2005 Chevrolet Cobalt Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or “Do Not
let this happen.”
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the
following topics:
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
• Features and Controls in Section 2
• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
• Climate Controls in Section 3
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
• Audio System(s) in Section 3
• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Seats
{CAUTION:
Manual Seats
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Your vehicle has manual seats. Lift the bar located
under the front of the seat to unlock it. Slide the seat to
where you want it and release the bar. Try to move
the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked
in place.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Seat Height Adjuster
Manual Lumbar
If your vehicle has this feature, the knob is located on
the front of the driver seat lower cushion.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the lumbar support.
The driver’s seat height adjuster is located on the
outboard side of the seat.
To raise the seat, move the lever upward repetitively
until the seat is at the desired height. To lower the seat,
move the lever downward repetitively until the seat is
at the desired height.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Seats
Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle may have heated front seats. This feature
heats the seat cushions. The switches are located on the
instrument panel above the climate control system.
Press the side of the
switch with the double
indicator lights to turn on
the heated seat at the
highest setting.
Driver’s Side Switch,
Passenger’s Side
Similar
Your vehicle has reclining seatbacks. The lever is
located on the outboard side of the seats. Lift the lever
to release the seatback. Move the seatback to where
you want it and release the lever to lock the seatback in
place. Press rearward on the seatback to be sure it is
locked into place.
Both indicator lights will be lit to indicate that the setting
is on high. Press the side of the switch with the single
indicator light to go to the low setting. The indicator light
will be lit to indicate that the setting is on low. Return
the switch to the center to turn off the heated seat.
If your vehicle has been turned off, the last heated seat
setting will be retained when the vehicle is started again.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
But do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can not do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can not do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go into it,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can not do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
Press the button on the
side of the head restraint
to adjust it.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position
reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the easy entry seat, do the following:
Easy Entry Seat
{CAUTION:
If the easy entry right front seat is not locked,
it can move. In a sudden stop or crash, the
person sitting there could be injured. After you
have used it, be sure to push rearward on an
easy entry seat to be sure it is locked.
{CAUTION:
1. Push down the easy entry seat handle located on
the rear of the seatback on the outboard side to
release the seatback.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
2. Tilt the seatback forward completely while pushing
the seat forward.
3. Move the seatback to its original position after
someone gets into the rear seat area. Make
sure the seatback is locked.
If your vehicle has this feature, the front passenger seat
can be used to easily get in and out of the rear seat.
4. Move the seat rearward until it locks into place.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
You can fold either side of the rear seatback down for
more cargo space.
To lower the rear seatback, follow these steps:
2. Once the handle is pulled, the seatback can be
pushed open through the trunk, or pulled open
from the inside of the vehicle.
To raise the rear seatback, lift it up and push rearward
until you hear a click. Push and pull on the seatback
to be sure it is locked into place.
1. Open the trunk and pull one or both of the small
handles located in the center of the trunk.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
pull forward on the top of the seatback at the
area of the latch to be sure it is locked.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she can not
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
{CAUTION:
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles, the
facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter...a lot!
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up. See
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider
does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something. In
a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if
you are belted.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km) of
home. And the greatest number of serious injuries
and deaths occur at speeds of less than 40 mph
(65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
wear safety belts?
This part is only for people of adult size.
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be in
most of them in the future. But they are
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to wear
it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to the height
that is right for you. See Shoulder Belt Height
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
6. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should
be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you. Adjust the
height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered
on your shoulder. The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
To move it down, push the
release button (A) and
move the height adjuster
to the desired position. You
can move the adjuster
up just by pushing up on
the shoulder belt guide.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of the
way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
After you move the adjuster to where you want it, try to
move it down without pushing the release button to
make sure it has locked into position.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Right Front Passenger Position
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except for
one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the
belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint
locking feature. If this happens, just let the belt go back
all the way and start again.
Rear Seat Passengers
It is very important for rear seat passengers to buckle
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in
the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All rear seating positions have lap-shoulder belts. Here
is how to wear one properly.
If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, tilt the
latch plate and keep pulling until you can buckle it.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt
go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this
applies force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would
be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force at your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take
belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a
crash, or if you pull the belt very quickly out of
the retractor.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
{CAUTION:
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides will provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for small adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions
the belt away from the neck and head.
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt
is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. To provide added safety belt comfort
for children who have outgrown child restraints and
booster seats and for smaller adults, the comfort
guides may be installed on the shoulder belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here is how to install a comfort guide and use the
safety belt:
2. Slide the guide under and past the belt. The elastic
cord must be under the belt. Then, place the guide
over the belt, and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Pull the elastic cord out from between the edge of
the seatback and the interior body to remove the
guide from its storage clip.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Pull the guide upward to expose its storage
clip, and then slide the guide onto the clip. Turn
the guide and clip inward and in between the seatback
and the interior body, leaving only the loop of elastic
cord exposed.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Safety Belt Extender
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. Although
you cannot see them, they are located on the retractor
part of the safety belts for the driver and right front
passenger. They help the safety belts reduce a person’s
forward movement in a moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal crash.
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you
should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer will
order you an extender. It is free. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
Child Restraints
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a
shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt
should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the
top of the thighs. It should never be worn over
the abdomen, which could cause severe or even
fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Older Children
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle.
Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
is sitting in the center rear seat passenger
position, move the child toward the safety belt
buckle. In either case, be sure that the shoulder belt
still is on the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash
the child’s upper body would have the restraint that
belts provide.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Infants and Young Children
{CAUTION:
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not
weigh much — until a crash. During a crash a
baby will become so heavy it is not possible to
hold it. For example, in a crash at only 25 mph
(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
become a 240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s
arms. A baby should be secured in an
appropriate restraint.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children and
infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system
nor its airbag system is designed for them.
Young children and infants need the protection
that a child restraint system can provide.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in a
rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so the
crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured in
appropriate infant restraints.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the
belt would apply force on a body area that is
unprotected by any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal injuries. Young
children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have used
the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to be
secured within the restraint. The vehicle’s belt
system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint’s harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps
that come down over each of the infant’s shoulders
and buckle together at the crotch. The five-point
harness system has two shoulder straps, two hip
straps and a crotch strap. A shield may take the
place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low
against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type
shield has straps that are attached to a wide,
shelf-like shield that swings up or to the side.
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. Some
booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, and some
high-back booster seats have a five-point harness. A
booster seat can also help a child to see out the window.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is, it
will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Here is why:
{CAUTION:
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system or
the LATCH system in your vehicle, but the child also
has to be secured within the restraint to help reduce the
chance of personal injury. When securing an add-on
child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the
restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint
instructions are important, so if they are not available,
obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer.
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. We,
therefore, recommend that child restraints be secured in
a rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing
infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat
and an older child riding in a booster seat. Never put a
rear-facing child restraint in the front passenger seat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child
is in it.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have a top strap, or “top tether.” It
can help restrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, a top strap must be properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints
are designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap
be anchored, do not use the restraint unless it is
anchored properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one can
be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit
is available.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top strap. If your child restraint has a
top strap, it should be anchored.
If the position you are using has a head restraint, route
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anchor the top strap to an anchor point specified in Top
an anchor point located on the same side of the vehicle
as the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
Top Strap Anchor Location
Each rear seating position has a top strap anchor.
Do not secure a child restraint in the right front
passenger’s position if a national or local law requires
that the top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored. There is no place to anchor the top
strap in this position.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether bracket is designed to anchor
only one child restraint. Attaching more than
one child restraint to a single bracket could
cause the anchor to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others could be
injured if this happens. To help prevent injury
to people and damage to your vehicle, attach
only one child restraint per bracket.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you will be
ready to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.
You will find the anchors behind the rear seat on the
filler panel.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You will find
anchors for each rear seating position.
This system, designed to make installation of child
restraints easier, does not use the vehicle’s safety belts.
Instead, it uses vehicle anchors and child restraint
attachments to secure the restraints. Some restraints
also use another vehicle anchor to secure a top
tether strap.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
C. Top Tether
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to its anchorage points, the restraint will not
be able to protect the child correctly. In a
crash, the child could be seriously injured or
killed. Make sure that a LATCH-type child
restraint is properly installed using the
anchorage points, or use the vehicle’s safety
belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
A. Lower Anchorage
B. Lower Anchorage
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle, you
need a child restraint designed for that system.
To assist you in locating the lower anchorages for this
child restraint system, each seating position with
the LATCH system has a visible metal anchorage point
in the seat where the seatback meets the seat
cushion.
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
for the LATCH System
Seat Position
1. Find the LATCH anchorages for the seating
position you want to use, where the bottom of the
seatback meets the back of the seat cushion.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
on page 1-39 if the child restraint has one.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Attach and tighten the LATCH attachments on the
child restraint to the LATCH anchorages in the
vehicle. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach and
tighten the top tether to the top tether anchorage.
The child restraint instructions will show you
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
tether from the top tether anchorage and then
disconnect the LATCH attachments from the LATCH
anchorages.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed.
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing
child restraint. If you need to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front seat, you will be using the
lap-shoulder belt to secure the restraint in this position.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
There is no top strap anchor in the right front
passenger’s position. Do not secure a child seat in this
position if a national or local law requires that the
top strap be anchored, or if the instructions that come
with the child restraint say that the top strap must
restraint has one.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger
airbag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. Never
put a rear-facing child restraint in this seat. Here is why:
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and
another frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your
vehicle may also have roof mounted side impact
airbags. Roof mounted side impact airbags are available
for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind
the driver and for the right front passenger and the
passenger seated directly behind that passenger.
If your vehicle has side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the airbag covering on the
garnish trim and ceiling near the side windows.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk of
injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. You may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
CAUTION: (Continued)
are designed to inflate only in moderate to
severe crashes where something hits the side
of your vehicle. They are not designed to
inflate in frontal, in rollover or in rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do not
replace them.
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy only in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes, or
in many side crashes. And, for some
unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags may
provide less protection in frontal crashes than
more forceful airbags have provided in the
past. The roof-mounted side impact airbags
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward, it
could seriously injure you. Safety belts help
keep you in position for airbag inflation before
and during a crash. Always wear your safety
belt even with frontal airbags. The driver
should sit as far back as possible while still
maintaining control of the vehicle. Occupants
should not lean on or sleep against the door.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults, but
not for young children and infants. Neither the
vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide. Always secure
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
There is an airbag
readiness light on
the instrument panel
cluster, which shows the
airbag symbol.
The driver’s airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The right front passenger’s airbag is in the instrument
panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver
and the person seated directly behind the driver, it
is located in the ceiling above the side windows.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the bag might not inflate properly or it
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put
anything between an occupant and an airbag,
and do not attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on or near any other
airbag covering. And, if your vehicle has
roof-mounted side impact airbags, never secure
anything to the roof of your vehicle by routing
the rope or tiedown through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an inflating side
impact airbag will be blocked. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept clear.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the right
front passenger and the person directly behind
that passenger, it is located in the ceiling above the
side windows.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
Airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbag
could inflate at a different crash speed than if
the object were moving.
• If the object deforms, the airbag could inflate at
a different crash speed than if the object does
not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
In addition, your vehicle has “dual-stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal sensors
which help the sensing system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal
impact. For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags
inflate at a level less than full deployment. For
more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If
the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that does not move or deform, the threshold level for
the reduced deployment is about 12 to 16 mph
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbag could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger) are not
intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
Your vehicle may or may not have side impact airbags.
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed threshold level.
(19 to 26 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h).
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle design.
Side impact airbags are not intended to inflate in frontal or
near-frontal impacts, rollovers or rear impacts. A side
impact airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the
vehicle that is struck.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or
the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually. But the
frontal airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and many
side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
is not toward the airbag. Side impact airbags would not
help you in many types of collisions, including frontal
or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts,
primarily because an occupant’s motion is not toward
those airbags. Airbags should never be regarded
as anything more than a supplement to safety belts, and
then only in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal
collisions for the driver’s and right front passenger’s
frontal airbags, and only in moderate to severe
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
the angle of the impact and how quickly the vehicle
slows down in frontal or near-frontal impacts. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is in a crash. For
both frontal and side impact airbags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which
inflates the airbag. The inflator, airbag, and related
hardware are all part of the airbag modules inside the
steering wheel and in the instrument panel in front of the
right front passenger. For vehicles with side impact
airbags, the airbag modules are located in the ceiling of
the vehicle, near the side windows.
side collisions for side impact airbags.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After an airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the airbag
inflated. Some components of the airbag module — the
steering wheel hub for the driver’s airbag, the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s bag or
the garnish trim and ceiling of your vehicle near the side
windows — will be hot for a short time. The parts of
the bag that come into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke
and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags.
Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from
seeing or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it
stop people from leaving the vehicle.
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment, you
should seek medical attention.
Your vehicle has a feature that will automatically unlock
the doors and turn the interior lamps on when the
airbags inflate (if battery power is available). You can
lock the doors again and turn the interior lamps off
by using the door lock and interior lamp controls.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from the
right front passenger airbag.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that your
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need to
replace other parts.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the side
impact airbag covering on the garnish trim and
ceiling near the side windows, the airbag may not
work properly. You may have to replace the
airbag module in the steering wheel, both the airbag
module and the instrument panel for the right
front passenger’s airbag, or side impact airbag
module, garnish trim and ceiling covering for
roof-mounted side impact airbags. Do not open or
break the airbag coverings.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. You do not want the system to
inflate while someone is working on your vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have information
about servicing your vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
{CAUTION:
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
For up to 10 minutes after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an
airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems in
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need to replace
the driver and front passenger’s safety belt retractor
assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new retractor
assembly will be there to help protect you in a collision.
After a crash you may need to replace the driver and
front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies, even
if the frontal airbags have not deployed. The driver
and front passenger’s safety belt retractor assemblies
contain the safety belt pretensioners. Have your
safety belt pretensioners checked if your vehicle has
been in a collision, or if your airbag readiness light stays
on after you start your vehicle or while you are driving.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
One key is used for the
ignition, the doors and all
other locks.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If your vehicle is equipped with the OnStar® system with
an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, OnStar® may be able to send a command to
for more information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealer removes
the key tag from the key and gives it to the first owner.
Each tag has a code on it that tells your dealer or a
qualified locksmith how to make extra keys. Keep the
tag in a safe place. If you lose your key, you will be able
to have a new one made easily using the tag.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If you need a new key, contact your dealer who can
obtain the correct key code. See Roadside Assistance
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
If your vehicle has this feature, the vehicle’s doors can
be locked and unlocked, and the trunk can be
unlocked from about 3 feet (1 m) up to 60 feet (18 m)
away with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
• Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
If you notice a decrease in the operating range of the
page 2-3 for information regarding conditions which may
affect the transmitters performance.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
The following functions are
available with the remote
keyless entry system.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
page 2-4.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or a
qualified technician for service.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q (Lock): Press the lock button to lock all the doors.
If enabled through the Driver Information Center
(DIC), the parking lamps may flash once and the horn
may chirp to indicate locking has occurred. Pressing the
lock button may arm the content theft-deterrent
more information.
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press this
button to locate your vehicle. The horn will sound
three times and the headlamps and parking lamps will
flash three times. Press and hold the button for
three seconds to sound the panic alarm. The horn will
sound and the headlamps and parking lamps will
flash for 30 seconds. Press the button again to cancel
the panic alarm.
" (Unlock): Press the unlock button one time to unlock
the driver’s door. Press the unlock button again within
five seconds to unlock the other doors. The interior
lamps will come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until
the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC,
the parking lamps will flash twice to indicate unlocking
has occurred. Pressing the unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter will disarm the
content-theft deterrent system. See Content
The vehicle may have programmable remote lock/unlock
confirmation. This feature provides feedback that a
command has been received by the vehicle. The
headlamps will flash and the horn may sound briefly.
See “Personalization Menu Modes” under DIC Vehicle
information.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
V (Trunk Release): Press this button to release the
trunk lid. The shift lever must be in PARK (P) for this
feature to operate on a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle. If your vehicle has a manual transaxle, the
parking break needs to be set for this feature to release
the trunk lid.
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is uniquely coded
to prevent another transmitter from unlocking the
vehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement
can be purchased through your dealer. Remember
to bring any additional transmitters so they can also be
re-coded to match the new transmitter. Once your
dealer has coded the new transmitter, the lost
transmitter cannot unlock the vehicle. The vehicle can
have a maximum of four transmitters coded to it.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in the remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about four years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work, at the normal range, in any location. If you
have to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter
works, it is probably time to change the battery. The
KEY FOB BATT LOW message in the vehicle’s DIC will
display, if the remote keyless entry transmitter battery
is low.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery do the following:
1. Insert a flat object with a thin edge into the notch,
located below the Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm
button, and pry the front and back apart.
2. Remove the old battery, but do not use a metal
object to do this.
3. Slide the new battery into the transmitter with the
positive side of the battery facing up. Use a type
CR2032 battery, or equivalent type.
4. Snap the front and the back of the transmitter
together.
5. Test the operation of the transmitter with the
vehicle.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
Doors and Locks
To lock the driver’s door from the outside, turn the
key clockwise. To unlock the door, turn the key
counterclockwise.
Door Locks
You can also use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to lock and unlock the doors.
{CAUTION:
From the inside, use the manual lock knobs on each
door or the power door lock switch to lock and unlock
all doors.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked. So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
Power Door Locks
Your vehicle may have
power door locks. If so,
they are located on
the driver’s and front
passenger’s door armrest.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
Press the right side of the switch with the lock symbol to
lock the doors. Press the left side of the switch to
unlock the doors.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delayed Locking
Programmable Automatic
Door Unlock
The delayed locking feature will delay the actual locking
of the doors for up to five seconds after exiting the
vehicle when the power door lock switch or remote
keyless entry transmitter is used to lock the vehicle.
Your vehicle can be programmed through the Driver
Information Center (DIC) to automatically unlock several
for more information.
If any door is open when locking the vehicle,
three chimes will sound signaling that the delayed
locking feature is active. Five seconds after the last door
is closed, all of the doors will lock and the parking
lamps will flash. To cancel the delay and lock the doors
immediately, press the lock button a second time.
Rear Door Security Locks
Your vehicle has rear door security locks that prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
If the key is in the ignition this feature will not lock
the doors.
The rear door security
locks are located on the
inside edge of each
rear door. You must
open the rear doors to
access them.
You can disable this function through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Automatic Door Locks
With this feature the doors will automatically lock when
the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P) for an automatic
transaxle, or the vehicle speed is greater than 5mph
(8km/h) for a manual transaxle.
The automatic door locking feature cannot be disabled.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the locks, do the following:
Trunk
1. Insert the key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it so the lock is in the
horizontal position.
To release the trunklid from the outside, use the key or
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
2. Close the door.
{CAUTION:
When you want to open a rear door when the security
lock is on, do the following:
It can be dangerous to drive with the trunk lid
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into your vehicle. You cannot see or
smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the trunk lid:
1. Unlock the door using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, the power door lock switch, or by
lifting the rear door manual lock.
2. Open the door from the outside.
To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following:
1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside.
2. Insert the key into the slot next to the rear door
security lock label and turn it so the lock is in the
vertical position.
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See Climate Control
System in the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
Lockout Protection
If you press the power door lock switch when the key is
in the ignition and any door is open, all the doors will
lock and the driver’s door will unlock. Be sure to remove
the key from the ignition when locking your vehicle.
The lockout protection can be overridden by pressing
and holding the power door lock in the lock position for
three seconds.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Remote Trunk Release
Emergency Trunk Release Handle
To open the trunk from
inside the vehicle, press
the remote trunk release
button located inside
the driver’s storage
compartment located on
the lower left side of
the instrument panel.
The remote trunk release will only work when either
the ignition is in OFF or ACC, the parking brake
is engaged, or the vehicle speed is less than
2 mph (3 km/h).
Notice: Using the emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point when securing
items in the trunk may damage it. Use the
emergency trunk release handle only to help you
open the trunk lid.
There is a glow-in-the-dark emergency trunk release
handle located on the inside of the trunk lid of your
vehicle. This handle will glow following exposure to light.
Pull the release handle and push the trunk lid open
from the inside to open the trunk.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Manual Windows
If your vehicle has manual windows, use the window
crank to open and close each window.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Power Windows
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature which allows the window to be lowered fully
without continuously pressing the switch. This switch is
labeled AUTO. Press the front of the switch to the
first position, and the driver’s window will open a small
amount. Press the switch down fully and the window
will go all the way down.
To stop the window while it is lowering, pull the front of
the switch.
Window Lockout
The driver’s window controls also include a lockout
switch. Press the right side of the switch to prevent the
rear passengers from using their window switches.
The driver can still control all the windows with
the lockout on. Press the switch to the left to return to
normal window operation. A red bar on the right side of
the switch indicates that the lockout feature is off.
Sedan Shown, Coupe Similar
If your vehicle has power windows, the switches on the
driver’s door armrest control each of the windows.
In addition, each passenger’s door has a window switch
that controls that door’s window. Press the front of
the switch to open the window. Pull the front of
the switch up to close it.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Arming the System
Sun Visors
With the ignition off, you can arm the system by doing
any one of the following:
To block out glare, swing down the visor(s). The visors
can also be detached from the center mount and
swung to the side to cover the windows.
• Press the remote keyless entry transmitter
lock button.
Visor Vanity Mirror
• Press the power door lock switch while the driver’s
door is open.
Your vehicle may have a driver’s side vanity mirror.
Swing down the sun visor and lift the cover to expose
the mirror.
• Turn the driver’s door key lock cylinder clockwise.
The system will arm either:
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
• thirty seconds after all the doors are closed, or
• sixty seconds with any door open.
If you press the lock button on the transmitter a second
time while all the doors are closed, the system will
arm immediately. The system will still arm in
sixty seconds if a door is open. When the open
door is closed, it will also become armed.
Content Theft-Deterrent
The security light will turn on to indicate that arming has
been initiated. Once the system is armed, the security
light will flash once every three seconds.
Your vehicle may have a
content theft-deterrent
alarm system.
If the security light is flashing twice per second, this
means that a door is open.
If you do not want to arm the system, you may lock the
car with the manual lock knobs on the doors.
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Disarming the System
How the System Alarm is Activated
You can disarm the system by doing any one of the
following:
If the system is armed, it can be activated by either:
• Opening the driver’s door or trunk. This will cause
a ten second pre-alarm chirp followed by a
thirty second full alarm of horn and lights.
• Press the remote keyless entry transmitter
unlock button.
• Turn the ignition on.
• Opening any other door. This will immediately
cause a full alarm of horn and lights for
thirty seconds.
• Turn the driver’s door key lock cylinder
counterclockwise.
When an alarm event has finished, the system will
re-arm itself automatically.
If the system is armed and the trunk is opened using
the trunk release button on the transmitter, the system
will temporarily disarm itself and re-arm when the
trunk has been closed. This allows the you to exit the
vehicle, lock the doors using the transmitter, and
open the trunk using the transmitter without having to
disarm and re-arm the system.
How to Turn Off the System Alarm
To turn off the system alarm, do one of the following:
• Press the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter. The system will then re-arm itself.
Once the system is disarmed, the security light will
stop flashing.
• Press the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter. This will also disarm the system.
• Insert the key in the driver’s door key lock cylinder
and turn it counterclockwise. This will also disarm
the system.
• Insert the key in the ignition and turn it on. This will
also disarm the system.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
During normal operation, the security light will go off
approximately three seconds after the key is turned to
RUN following an engine start. The security light is
located on the instrument panel cluster. See Instrument
Simulated Armed Mode
If you choose not to arm the system or if proper arming
cannot be completed, the Content Theft Deterrent
system will flash the security light once every
three seconds after a one minute delay with all the
doors closed. This flashing serves as a visual deterrent;
however, the system is not armed.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from START
as soon as the engine starts.
How to Detect a Tamper Condition
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the
engine off. However, your Passlock® system is
not working properly and must be serviced by your
dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this
time. See your dealer for service. Or see Roadside
If you hear three chirps when you press the unlock, lock,
or trunk release buttons on the remote keyless
transmitter, it means that the content theft security
system alarm was activated previously.
Passive Arming
If passive arming is enabled through the DIC, the
system will arm itself 60 seconds after cycling the
ignition off and closing all doors.
You may also want to check the fuses. See Fuses
Passlock®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ignition Positions
With the key in the ignition switch, you can turn it to
four different positions.
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Do not drive at any one speed, fast or slow, for
the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make
full-throttle starts.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new
brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear
and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake
linings.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in. If
it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while you
turn the key hard. If none of this works, then
your vehicle needs service.
page 4-38 for more information.
9(LOCK): This position locks your steering column. It
is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only be able to
remove your key when the ignition is turned to LOCK.
If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignition
switch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shift lever
is in PARK (P).
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shift Lock Release
{CAUTION:
The following procedure allows the ignition to be turned
to LOCK and for ignition key removal in case of a
dead battery or low voltage battery.
If you have a manual transaxle removing the
key from the ignition switch will lock the
steering column and result in a loss of ability to
steer the vehicle. This could cause a collision. If
you need to turn the engine off while the vehicle
is moving, turn the key to ACC.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in PARK (P).
ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operates some of
your electrical accessories. It unlocks the steering wheel
and ignition.
R (RUN): This is the position the switch returns to after
you start your engine and release the switch. The
switch stays in the RUN position when the engine is
running. But even when the ignition is not running, you
can use RUN to operate your electrical accessories
and to display some warning and indicator lights.
/ (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The ignition switch will
return to RUN for normal driving.
2. Using a tool, pry off the cover from the bottom of
the steering column.
A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’s door
when the key has not been removed from the ignition.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle is equipped with a Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) feature which will allow the radio, power
windows and sunroof to continue to work up to
10 minutes after the ignition is turned to OFF.
Your vehicle’s radio will work when the ignition key is in
RUN or ACC. Once the key is turned from RUN to OFF,
the radio, power windows and sunroof will continue to
work for up to 10 minutes or until any door is opened.
Starting the Engine
Automatic Transaxle
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that is
a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
3. Place your finger into the access hole and locate
the plunger.
Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehicle
moving could damage the transaxle. Shift into
PARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.
4. Press and hold the plunger toward the driver’s
door while turning the ignition key to LOCK.
Remove the key.
Have your vehicle serviced at your GM dealer as soon
as possible.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for about three seconds. If the vehicle starts
briefly but then stops again, do the same thing,
but this time keep the pedal down for five or
six seconds. This clears the extra gasoline from
the engine.
Manual Transaxle
The shift lever should be in NEUTRAL and the parking
brake engaged. Hold the clutch pedal to the floor
and start the engine. Your vehicle will not start if the
clutch pedal is not all the way down — that is a safety
feature.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition to START. When the engine starts, let go
of the key. The idle speed will go down as your
engine gets warm.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer than
15 seconds at a time will cause your battery to
be drained much sooner. And the excessive heat
can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
Engine Coolant Heater
If your vehicle has this feature, in very cold weather
0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine coolant heater
can help. You will get easier starting and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up. Usually, the
coolant heater should be plugged in a minimum of
four hours prior to starting your vehicle. At temperatures
above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater is not
required.
2. If it does not start, wait about 15 seconds and try
again to start the engine by turning the ignition to
START. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When your engine has run about 10 seconds to
warm up, your vehicle is ready to be driven. Do not
run your engine at high speed when it is cold.
If the weather is below freezing (32°F or 0°C), let
the engine run for a few minutes to warm up.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature, the
kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
a GM dealer in the area where you will be parking
your vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. For
the 2.2L engine, the electrical cord is located on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle between the strut
and the air cleaner/filter. For the 2.0L engine,
the electrical cord is located on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle near the strut.
Automatic Transaxle Operation
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
transaxle, the shift lever is located on the console
between the seats.
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle
shift lock control system. You have to fully apply
your regular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)
when the ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift
out of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shift lever
by pushing the shift lever all the way into PARK (P), or
by releasing the shift lever button on floor shift
console models as you maintain brake application. Then
move the shift lever into the gear you want. Press the
shift lever button before moving the shift lever. See
page 2-28.
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can move
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
trailer, see Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle)
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see If
on page 4-29.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving with the automatic transaxle. If you need
more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator all the way down.
{CAUTION:
SECOND (2): This position is also used for normal
driving. However, it offers braking from the engine for
slight downgrades where the vehicle would otherwise
accelerate due to steepness of grade. If repetitive shifts
occur between third and fourth gears on steep uphills,
this position can be used to prevent repetitive shifting.
Fuel economy will be lower than AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D). Here are some times you might
choose SECOND (2) instead of AUTOMATIC
OVERDRIVE (D):
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
while the engine is running at high speed may
damage the transaxle. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not
running at high speeds when shifting your vehicle.
• When driving on hilly, winding roads.
• When towing a trailer, so there is less shifting
between gears.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FIRST (1): This position holds you in the lowest gear
possible for the given vehicle speed. It provides
more engine braking but lower fuel economy than
SECOND (2). You can use it on very steep hills as a
brake assist, or in deep snow or mud.
Here is how to operate your manual transaxle:
FIRST (1): Press the clutch pedal and shift into
FIRST (1). Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as
you press the accelerator pedal.
You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are going less
than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to a complete
stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1), put the shift
lever in NEUTRAL and let up on the clutch. Press
the clutch pedal back down. Then shift into FIRST (1).
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transaxle. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift into SECOND (2).
Then, slowly let up on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
Manual Transaxle Operation
This is your shift pattern.
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5): Shift into
THIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the same way
you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up on the clutch
pedal as you press the accelerator pedal.
To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and press the
brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake pedal, and shift to
NEUTRAL.
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start or idle
your engine.
Up-Shift Light
If you have a manual
REVERSE (R): To back up, press down the clutch
pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Let up on the clutch
pedal slowly while pressing the accelerator pedal.
transaxle, you have an
up-shift light. This light will
show you when to shift
to the next higher gear for
the best fuel economy.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transaxle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
United States Only
Also, use REVERSE (R), along with the parking brake,
for parking your vehicle.
When this light comes on, you can shift to the next
higher gear if weather, road and traffic conditions let you.
For the best fuel economy, accelerate slowly and shift
when the light comes on.
Shift Speeds
While you accelerate, it is normal for the light to go on
and off if you quickly change the position of the
accelerator. Ignore the light when you downshift.
{CAUTION:
If you skip a gear when you downshift, you
could lose control of your vehicle. You could
injure yourself or others. Don’t shift down more
than one gear at a time when you downshift.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the parking brake, Hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
Shifting Into Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle)
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer (Manual
If you forget to release your parking brake, a chime will
sound and a warning light will flash when the parking
brake is applied and the vehicle is moving faster
than 5 mph (8 kph). See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-37.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
1. Hold the brake pedal down and set the
parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holding the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and then
shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move
the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pushing
the button. If you can, it means that the shift lever
was not fully locked into PARK (P).
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
information.
Shifting Out of Park (P) (Automatic
Transaxle)
This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock
release system. The shift lock release is designed to:
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer or a professional towing service.
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift
lever is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
Parking Your Vehicle
• prevent movement of the shift lever out of PARK (P)
unless the ignition is in a position other than LOCK.
Before leaving your vehicle, fully press the clutch pedal
in, move the shift lever into REVERSE (R), and firmly
apply the parking brake. Once the shift lever has
been placed in REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedal
pressed in, you can turn the ignition key to LOCK,
remove the key and release the clutch. See Manual
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of a an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parking Over Things That Burn
Engine Exhaust
{CAUTION:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness
and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
• Repairs were not done correctly.
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
{CAUTION:
modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass or other
things that can burn.
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Engine While Parked
{CAUTION:
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured. To
be sure your vehicle will not move, even when
you are on fairly level ground, always set your
parking brake and move the shift lever to
PARK (P).
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
on page 2-26.
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a
on page 4-38.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard. See
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Remote Control Mirror
Mirrors
Adjust the outside mirrors so that the side of the vehicle
can be seen while sitting in a comfortable driving
position. Adjust the driver’s outside mirror with the
control lever located on the driver’s door.
Manual Rearview Mirror
To reduce glare from lamps behind you, move the lever
toward you to the night position.
To adjust the passenger’s outside mirror, sit in the
driver’s seat and have a passenger adjust the mirror
for you.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
The mirror is a manual fold design.
The automatic dimming rearview mirror automatically
dims to the proper level to minimize glare from
lights behind you after dark.
Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle has this feature, the outside power mirror
control is located on the driver’s door armrest.
Outside Manual Mirror
Adjust your outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle and have a clear view of objects
behind you. The mirror can be folded in to enter
narrow areas.
Move the selector switch to the left or right to choose
the driver’s side or passenger’s side mirror you want to
adjust. Then press the control pad to move each
mirror in the desired direction.
Adjust each mirror so you can see the side of your
vehicle and the area beside and behind your vehicle.
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
www.onstarcanada.com. Contact OnStar® at
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827), or press the
OnStar® button to speak to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours
a day, 7 days a week.
Outside Convex Mirror
{CAUTION:
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com.
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
OnStar® Services
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe and
Sound Plan is included for the first year. You can
extend this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions and Connections Plan to meet your needs.
For more information, press the OnStar® button to speak
with an advisor.
The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from the
driver’s seat. It also makes things appear farther
away than they really are.
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
OnStar® System
• Roadside Assistance
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services.
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
A complete OnStar® user’s guide and the terms and
conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
• Online Concierge
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Directions and Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions
Storage Areas
Glove Box
• RideAssist
Open the glove box by lifting up on the lever. Close the
glove box with a firm push.
• Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Personal Calling
Cupholder(s)
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability is available if your hand-held cell phone is
lost, forgotten, or has a low battery. It is a hands-free
wireless phone that is integrated into the vehicle.
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® user’s guide in
the vehicle’s glove box or visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstarcanada.com; or speak with an OnStar®
advisor by pressing the OnStar® button or by calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
There are two cupholders located at the front of the
center console, in front of the shift lever. There are also
cupholder for the rear seat passengers located at the
rear of the center console.
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle may have a center console armrest with
storage area. Use the lever on the front of the console to
open it.
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Driver’s Storage Compartment
Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar® Personal Calling
that uses minutes to access up-to-date weather and
traffic reports for your area, news and sports updates,
stock quotes, entertainment and more. Customize
your information profile at www.myonstar.com. See the
OnStar® user’s guide for more information.
The driver’s storage compartment is located near the
left side of the steering column on the bottom of
the instrument panel. It can be used to store small items
and contains the remote trunk release switch. For
more information, see Remote Trunk Release under
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To open or close the sunroof, the ignition must be
turned to ON or ACC, or Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) must be active. See Retained
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. You will see
it inside the back wall of the trunk. Put small loads
behind the net. It can help keep them from falling over
during sharp turns or quick starts and stops.
Press and hold the switch rearward to open the glass
panel to the vent position. Press and hold the switch
rearward a second time to open the sunroof. If the
sunshade is closed, it will open automatically with the
sunroof.
Unclip a corner of the convenience net to fit larger
objects behind the net, then reclip it to secure them in
place. The net is not for larger, heavier loads. Store
them in the trunk as far forward as you can.
To close the sunroof, press the switch forward and hold
it until the sunroof is closed. The sunroof will stop if
the switch is released. The sunshade must be closed
manually.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when you
are not using it.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be opened or closed if
the vehicle has an electrical failure.
Sunroof
Your vehicle may be
equipped with a power
sunroof. The switch
that operates it is located
on the headliner.
Notice: If you force the sunshade forward of the
sliding glass panel, damage will occur and the
sunroof may not open or close properly. Always
close the glass panel before closing the sunshade.
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of your instrument panel are the following:
on page 3-17.
M. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). Accessory Power
Outlet (If Equipped). See Ashtrays and Cigarette
on page 3-16.
E. Audio Steering Wheel Controls (If Equipped). See
page 3-17.
page 3-10.
on page 3-15.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located
near the center of the
instrument panel.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the
steering wheel.
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tilt Wheel
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel
before you drive. You can raise the steering wheel to
the highest level to give your legs more room when you
enter and exit the vehicle.
The lever that allows you to tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
on page 3-13.
To tilt the wheel, pull down the lever. Then move the
wheel to a comfortable position, pull up the lever to lock
the wheel in place.
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions allow
you to signal a turn or a lane change.
To change the headlamps from low beam to high
beam, push the turn signal lever away from you.
When the high beams are
on, this light on the
instrument panel cluster
will also be on.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
To change the headlamps from high beam to low beam,
pull the turn signal lever toward you.
Flash-to-Pass
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To use it, pull the turn signal/multifunction lever toward
you until the high-beam headlamps come on, then
release the lever to turn them off.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal. If a bulb is burned
out, replace it to help avoid an accident.
If the arrows do not go on at all when you signal a turn,
page 5-91.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
x (Delay): Move the lever to this position to choose
a delayed wiping cycle. Turn the intermittent adjust
band up and down to set for a shorter or longer delay
between wipes. To the left of the adjust band are
bars, increasing in size from bottom to top, that indicate
the frequency of the wipes. Smaller bars mean the
wipers movement is less frequent. Larger bars mean the
movement is more frequent.
Windshield Wipers
6 (Low Speed): Move the lever up to the first
setting past intermittent, for steady wiping at low speed.
1 (High Speed): Move the lever up to the second
setting past intermittent, for wiping at high speed.
Use this lever, located on the right side of the steering
wheel, to operate the windshield wipers.
8 (Mist): Move the lever all the way down to this
position for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until the
windshield wipers start; then let go. The windshield
wipers will stop after one wiping cycle. If you want
additional wiping cycles, hold the lever down longer.
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the
windshield wipers.
& (Intermittent; Speed Sensitive Wipers): Move the
lever to this position for intermittent or speed sensitive
operation. When you select this position, the delay
will vary depending on the vehicles speed, as well as,
the manually selected delay.
Damaged wiper blades may prevent you from seeing
well enough to drive safely. To avoid damage, be sure to
clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before
using them.
If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield, carefully
loosen or thaw them. If your blades do become
damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wiper motor. A
circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload. If the
motor gets stuck, turn the wipers off, clear away
the snow or ice, and then turn the wipers back on.
Cruise Control
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
25 mph (40 km/h).
As an added safety feature, if the wipers are on for more
than 15 seconds, the vehicle’s headlamps will turn on
automatically. They will turn off when the wipers
are turned off.
{CAUTION:
Windshield Washer
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
To wash your windshield, press the button at the end of
the lever until the washers begin.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
When you release the button, the washers will stop, but
the wipers will continue to wipe for about three times
or will resume the speed you were using before.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
J (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruise
control system on and off.
+RES (Resume): Press this part of the button to
resume a set speed and to accelerate the speed.
{CAUTION:
−SET (Set): Press this part of the button to set a speed
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
and to decrease the speed.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press the on/off button to turn cruise control on.
The indicator light on the button will come on.
2. Get to the speed you want.
3. Press the −SET part of the control button and
release it. The CRUISE ENGAGED message
will appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC)
to show the system is engaged.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
When you apply the brakes or clutch, the cruise control
will shut off.
If the vehicle is in cruise control and the Traction
Control System (TCS) begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See
road conditions allow, the cruise control can be
used again.
The cruise control buttons are located on the
steering wheel.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resuming a Set Speed
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. To return to your
previously set speed, you do not need to go through the
set process again. Once you’re going about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more, you can press the +RES part of the
button briefly.
If the cruise control system is already engaged,
• Push and hold the −SET part of the button until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
−SET part of the button briefly. Each time you
do this, you’ll go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
This will take you back up to your previously chosen
speed and stay there.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
1. Disengage the cruise control by applying the brake
pedal but do not turn it off. Accelerate to a higher
speed and reset the cruise control.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to step
on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift to
a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control. Many
drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t use
cruise control on steep hills.
2. If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the +RES part of the button. Hold it there
until you get up to the speed you want, and
then release the button. To increase your speed in
very small amounts, press the +RES part of the
button briefly and then release it. Each time you do
this, your vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
faster.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The exterior lamp switch has the following four positions:
Ending Cruise Control
To end cruise control, step lightly on the brake pedal or
the clutch if your vehicle has a manual transmission.
2 (Headlamps): This position turns on the
headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps.
Stepping on the brake pedal or clutch will only end the
current cruise control session. Press the cruise
control on/off button to turn the system completely off.
; (Parking Lamps): This position turns on the
parking lamps and taillamps only.
AUTO (Automatic Headlamp System): This position
automatically turns on the Daytime Running Lamps
during daytime, and the headlamps, parking lamps, and
taillamps at night.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition, your
cruise control set speed memory is erased.
P (Off/On): This position is the momentary Off/On
switch for the Automatic Headlamp System. In Canada,
this only works when the vehicle is in PARK (P).
Headlamps
When operating in AUTO, a momentary turn of the
switch to off/on will turn off the Automatic Headlamp
System. An AUTO LIGHTS OFF message will display on
the driver information center and a chime will sound.
Rotating the switch to off/on again will turn the Automatic
Headlamp System back on. An AUTO LIGHTS ON
message will display on the driver information center.
The Automatic Headlamp System is always turned on at
the beginning of an ignition cycle.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
operates the exterior lamps.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has a light sensor on top of the instrument
panel. Make sure it is not covered or the headlamps
will come on when you do not need them.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature activates the headlamps and parking lamps
after the windshield wipers are turned on. For this
feature to work, automatic lighting must be enabled. See
The DRL system will make both front turn signal lamps
turn on when the following conditions are met:
• The ignition is on.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps will immediately turn off. They will also turn
off if the windshield wiper control is turned off.
• The exterior lamp control is turned to AUTO.
• The light sensor detects daytime light.
• The shift lever is not in PARK (P).
Headlamps on Reminder
While the DRL system is on, the taillamps, sidemarker
lamps, and instrument panel lights will not be
illuminated.
If you open the driver’s door with the ignition off and the
lamps on, you will hear a warning chime.
The DRL system will be off any time your vehicle is in
PARK (P). The DRL system on U.S. vehicles can
also be turned off by using the off/on switch for
one ignition cycle.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamps
Instrument Panel Brightness
The fog lamp button is
located on the instrument
panel, to the left of the
steering wheel.
The control for this feature
is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
The ignition must be on to turn your fog lamps on.
Push the button to turn the fog lamps on. An indicator
light in the instrument panel cluster will come on
when the fog lamps are on. Push the button again to
turn the fog lamps off.
Turn the knob clockwise to brighten the lights or
counterclockwise to dim them.
The parking lamps will automatically turn on and off
when the fog lamps are turned on and off.
Dome Lamp
The fog lamps will turn off while the high-beam
headlamps are turned on.
Your vehicle may have a dome lamp.
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn the
lamp off, even when a door is opened.
1 (Door): Move the lever to this position to turn the
lamp on whenever a door is opened.
+ (On): Move the lever to this position to turn the
dome lamp on.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entry/Exit Lighting
Accessory Power Outlets
The lamps inside your vehicle will go on when you open
any door. These lamps will fade out after about
20 seconds after all of the doors have been closed or
when the ignition is turned to ON. These lamps will also
go on when you press the trunk release, unlock
symbol button or the horn symbol on the keyless entry
system transmitter.
Accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or CB
radio. The outlet can accept electrical equipment rated
at a maximum of 20 amps.
The accessory power outlet is located in the center
console, rearward of the shift lever.
To use the outlet, remove the cover. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
The lamps inside your vehicle will stay on for about
20 seconds after your key is removed from the ignition
to provide an illuminated exit.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always turn
off electrical equipment when not in use and do
not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
amperage rating.
Mirror Reading Lamps
Your vehicle may have reading lamps on the rearview
mirror. Push the button to turn the reading lamps on
and off.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information
on the accessory power outlet.
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle is equipped with a battery saver feature
designed to protect your vehicle’s battery.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When any interior lamp is left on and the ignition is
turned off, the battery rundown protection system will
automatically turn the lamp off after 20 minutes. This will
avoid draining the battery.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
Climate Controls
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling,
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Ashtrays and Cigarette Lighter
Your vehicle may have an ashtray and cigarette lighter.
To use the lighter, located on the instrument panel
below the climate controls, push it in all the way and let
go. When it is ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it is
heating will not allow the lighter to back away from
the heating element when it is hot. Damage from
overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating. Do not use
anything other than the cigarette lighter in the
heating element.
Vehicles with Air Conditioning shown, without Air
Conditioning similar
Operation
To clean the center console ashtray, remove the entire
ashtray and empty it.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
H (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
) (Bi-Level): This mode directs approximately half of
the air to the instrument panel outlets, and then
directs the remaining air to the floor outlets. Cooler air is
directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the
floor outlets.
h (Recirculate): Press this button to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or to help
heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly. An
indicator light above the button will come on in this mode.
The air conditioning compressor also comes on. This
mode is not available for floor, defog and defrost modes.
When the recirculation button is pressed, the RECIRC
indicator light will flash five times and outside air will be
delivered. Operation in this mode during periods of high
humidity and cool outside temperatures may result in
increased window fogging. If window fogging is
6 (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield and
side windows.
The left knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. Information on defogging and defrosting
can be found later in this section.
experienced, select the defrost mode.
Outside Air: This mode allows outside air to circulate
through your vehicle. This mode is automatically
active if recirculate is not selected. There is no button
for outside air.
Recirculation mode is not allowed in this mode.
9(Fan): Turn the center knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
In any setting other than off, the fan will run continuously
with the ignition on. The fan must be turned on to run
the air conditioning (AC) compressor.
#(Air Conditioning): If your vehicle has air
conditioning, press this button to turn the air conditioning
system on or off. When this button is pressed, an
indicator light above the button will come on to let you
know the air conditioning is activated.
9 (Off): To turn the fan off, turn the knob all the way
counterclockwise to the off position.
Temperature Control: Turn the right knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the
temperature inside your vehicle.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is
used properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost
from your windshield and side windows. Use the
defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture and
warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode to
remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
For best results, clear all snow and ice from the
windshield before defrosting.
For quick cool down on hot days:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the recirculation mode.
3. Select air conditioning.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
Turn the left knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become too
dry. To prevent this from happening, after the air in
your vehicle has cooled, turn off the recirculation
by pressing the button again.
-(Defog): This mode directs approximately half of the
air to the windshield and the side window outlets and
half to the floor outlets. When you select this mode the
system runs the air conditioning compressor. To
defog the windows faster, turn the temperature control
knob clockwise to the warmest setting.
The air conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Recirculation mode is not available in defog mode.
The air conditioning compressor cannot be turned on
when the fan is off.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
0(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield, with some air directed to the side window
outlets and the floor outlets. When you select this mode
the system runs the air conditioning compressor. To
defrost the windows faster, turn the temperature control
knob clockwise to the warmest setting.
Recirculation mode is not available in defog mode.
Outlet Adjustment
Rear Window Defogger
Use the thumbwheels located next to and below the air
outlets to change the direction of the airflow and to
open and close the outlets.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in RUN.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the windshield that may
block the flow of air into your vehicle.
< (Rear): Press the button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. Be sure to clear as much snow from
the rear window as possible. An indicator light above
the button will come on to let you know that the
rear window defogger is activated.
• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
15 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for approximately
seven minutes before turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by pressing the button again or by
turning off the engine.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages
that may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
as you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s
advice. Waiting to do repairs can be costly — and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning
lights and gages. They’re a big help.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you will
see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the
engine just to let you know they’re working. If you are
familiar with this section, you should not be alarmed
when this happens.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, about how much fuel is left in the tank, and many other things you will need to drive safely and
economically.
United States Uplevel Cluster shown, Canada similar
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
United States Base Level Cluster shown, Canada similar
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Safety Belt Reminder Light
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is
already buckled.
Your vehicle’s odometer works together with the
driver information center. You can set a Trip A and
Trip B odometer. See “Trip Information” under DIC
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay on
for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
The odometer mileage can be checked without the
vehicle running. Simply open the driver’s door and the
mileage will be displayed briefly.
If your vehicle ever needs a new odometer installed, the
new one will be set to the correct mileage total of the
old odometer.
If the driver’s belt is already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light will come on.
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
Notice: If you operate the engine with the
tachometer in the shaded warning area, your vehicle
could be damaged, and the damages would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the airbag’s electrical system for malfunctions.
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem.
The system check includes the airbag sensor, the airbag
modules, the wiring and the crash sensing and
diagnostic module. For more information on the airbag
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start your vehicle.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash
for a few seconds.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
light does not come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
Then the light should go
out. This means the
system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your
airbag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Up-Shift Light
Your vehicle may have an up-shift light. When this light
comes on, you should shift to the next higher gear if
weather, road, and traffic conditions allow you to.
The charging system light
will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition,
and the engine is not
running, as a check
This light is located in your
instrument panel cluster to
the left of the tachometer.
to show you it is working.
Then it should go out when the engine is started.
If it stays on, or comes on while you are driving, you
may have a problem with the electrical charging system.
Have it checked by your GM dealer. Driving while this
light is on could drain your battery.
United States Only
more information.
If you must drive a short distance with the light on, be
certain to turn off all your accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning light
will also come on when you set your parking brake.
The light will stay on if your parking brake does
not release fully. If it stays on after your parking brake is
fully released, it means you have a brake problem.
Brake System Warning Light
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part is not working, the other part can
still work and stop you. For good braking, though,
you need both parts working well.
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push. Or, the pedal may go closer to the
floor. It may take longer to stop. If the light is still on,
have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing
If the warning light comes on, there is a brake problem.
Have your brake system inspected right away.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
United States
Canada
properly if the brake system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system warning light on
can lead to an accident. If the light is still on
after you have pulled off the road and stopped
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service.
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
Enhanced Traction System
Warning Light
If your vehicle is equipped
If your vehicle is equipped
with the Enhanced
Traction System (ETS),
this warning light should
come on briefly as
with the anti-lock brake
system, the light will come
on when your engine is
started and may stay on for
several seconds. That is
normal.
you start the engine.
If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. Or, if the
light comes on when you are driving, stop as soon
as possible and turn the ignition off. Then start
If the warning light does not come on, then have it fixed
so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on when you are
driving, there may be a problem with your Enhanced
Traction System and your vehicle may need service.
When this warning light is on, the system will not limit
wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
the engine again to reset the system. If the light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving, your
vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, you still have brakes, but you do
not have anti-lock brakes. If the regular brake system
warning light is also on, you do not have anti-lock brakes
and there is a problem with your regular brakes. See
The anti-lock brake system warning light will come on
briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN. This
is normal. If the light does not come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Enhanced Traction System warning light may come
on for the following reasons:
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
• If you turn the system off by moving the shift lever
to FIRST (1), the warning light will come on and
stay on. To turn the system back on, move the shift
lever back to a position other than FIRST (1).
The warning light should go off. See Enhanced
information.
The engine coolant
temperature warning light
will come on when the
engine has overheated.
• The warning light will come on when you set your
parking brake with the engine running, and it will
stay on if your parking brake does not release fully.
If the transaxle shift lever is in any position other
than FIRST (1) and the warning light stays on after
your parking brake is fully released, it means
there is a problem with the system.
If this happens you should pull over and turn off the
page 5-29 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause your vehicle to
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not be
covered by your warranty. Never drive with the
engine coolant temperature warning light on.
• If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
If the Enhanced Traction System warning light comes
on and stays on for an extended period of time when the
transaxle shift lever is in any position other than
FIRST (1), your vehicle needs service.
This light will also come on when starting your vehicle.
If it doesn’t, have your vehicle serviced.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
cause your engine not to run as efficiently as designed.
You may notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling
when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation
on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (These
conditions may go away once the engine is warmed up.)
This will be detected by the system and cause the
light to turn on.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If
the Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still
flashing, follow the previous steps, and see your dealer
for service as soon as possible.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully install
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Oil Pressure Light
If you have a low engine
oil pressure problem, this
light will stay on after
you start your engine, or
come on when you
are driving. This indicates
that your engine is not
receiving enough oil.
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
The engine could be low on oil, or could have some
other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
The oil light could also come on in three other situations:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
• When the ignition is on but the engine is not
running, the light will come on as a test to show you
it is working, but the light will go out when you
turn the ignition to START. If it does not come on
with the ignition on, you may have a problem
with the fuse or bulb. Have it fixed right away.
• If you are idling at a stop sign, the light may blink
on and then off.
• If you make a hard stop, the light may come on for
a moment. This is normal.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fog Lamp Light
{CAUTION:
The fog lamps light will
come on when the fog
lamps are in use.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. If
you do, your engine can become so hot that it
catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
The light will go out when the fog lamps are turned off.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
Security Light
This light flashes when the
vehicle security system is
activated.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuel Gage
Boost Gage
Your fuel gage tells you
about how much fuel you
have left.
United States
Canada
Here are four things that some owners ask about. None
of these show a problem with your fuel gage:
• At the service station, the gas pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
gage indicated. For example, the gage may have
indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a
little more or less than half the tank’s capacity to
fill the tank.
• The gage moves a little when you turn a corner or
speed up.
If your vehicle is equipped with this gage, it is located
near the driver’s side of the instrument panel cluster.
This gage indicates vacuum during light to moderate
throttle and boost under heavier throttle.
The gage displays the air pressure level going into the
engine’s combustion chamber.
The gage is automatically centered at zero every time
the ignition is turned to RUN. Actual vacuum or boost is
displayed from this zero point. Changes in ambient
pressure, such as driving in mountains and changing
weather, will slightly change the zero reading.
• The gage doesn’t go back to empty when you turn
off the ignition.
For your fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Operation and Displays
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. The DIC has
different modes which can be accessed by pressing
the DIC buttons. The button functions are detailed in
the following.
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display gives you
the status of many of your vehicle’s systems. The DIC is
also used to display driver personalization menu modes
and warning/status messages. All messages will appear
in the DIC display, located at the bottom of the
Information Modes
tachometer on the instrument panel cluster.
4 (Information): Press this button to scroll through the
The DIC buttons are
located to the right of the
steering wheel on the
instrument panel.
following vehicle information modes:
Outside Air Temperature and Odometer
Press the information button until the outside air
temperature and the odometer are displayed. This mode
shows the temperature outside of the vehicle in either
°F or °C and the total distance the vehicle has been
driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). The
outside air temperature will appear on the left side of
the DIC display and the odometer will appear on
the right side of the display.
4 (Information): Press this button to scroll through the
vehicle information mode displays.
r (Reset): Press this button to reset some vehicle
information mode displays, select a personalization
menu mode setting, or acknowledge a warning
message.
To change the DIC display to English or metric units,
page 3-40.
Press the information and reset buttons at the same
time to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRIP A or TRIP B
ECON
Press the information button until TRIP A or TRIP B is
displayed. These modes show the current distance
traveled since the last reset for each trip odometer in
either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Both odometers can
be used at the same time.
Press the information button until ECON is displayed.
This mode shows how many miles per gallon (mpg)
or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle is
getting based on current and past driving conditions.
Press and hold the reset button while ECON is displayed
to reset the average fuel economy. Average fuel
economy will then be calculated starting from that point.
If the average fuel economy is not reset, it will be
continually updated each time you drive.
Each trip odometer can be reset to zero separately by
pressing and holding the reset button for a few seconds
while the desired trip odometer is displayed.
FUEL RANGE
AV SPEED
Press the information button until FUEL RANGE is
displayed. This mode shows the remaining distance you
can drive without refueling in either miles (mi) or
kilometers (km). It is based on fuel economy and the
fuel remaining in the tank.
Press the information button until AV SPEED is
displayed. This mode shows the vehicle’s average
speed in miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per
hour (km/h).
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range is
an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
The FUEL RANGE mode cannot be reset.
Press and hold the reset button while AV SPEED is
displayed to reset the average vehicle speed.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OIL LIFE
DIC Warnings and Messages
Press the information button until OIL LIFE is displayed.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the
oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you
to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
These messages will appear if there is a problem
sensed in one of your vehicle’s systems.
Any message will clear when the vehicle’s condition is
no longer present. The warning message will come back
on the next time the vehicle is turned off and back on
if the condition is still present. With most messages,
a warning chime will sound when the message is
displayed. You can also acknowledge and clear some
warning messages from the DIC display by pressing
either the reset or information buttons. Your vehicle may
have other warning messages.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
page 6-4.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. See “How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
and “OIL–LIFE RESET” under DIC Vehicle
AUTO LIGHTS OFF
This message is displayed if the automatic headlamp
system is disabled with the headlamp switch.
AUTO LIGHTS ON
COOLANT
This message is displayed if the automatic headlamp
system is enabled with the headlamp switch.
Press the information button until COOLANT is
displayed. This mode shows the temperature of the
engine coolant in either °F or °C.
BRAKE FLUID
This message will display if the ignition is on to inform
the driver that the brake fluid level is low. Have the
brake system serviced by your GM dealer as soon
as possible.
Personalization Modes
Press the information and reset buttons at the same
time to enter the personalization menu. See DIC Vehicle
the personalization menu modes.
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHANGE OIL SOON
ENG PWR REDUCED
This message is displayed when the life of the engine
oil has expired and it should be changed.
This message informs you that the vehicle has reduced
engine power to avoid damaging the engine.
When you acknowledge the CHANGE OIL SOON
message by clearing it from the display, you still must
reset the engine oil life system separately. See
“OIL-LIFE RESET” under DIC Vehicle Personalization
information.
ERROR
This message will display while viewing the odometer if
there is a problem with the instrument panel cluster.
See your GM dealer for service.
ICE POSSIBLE
This message appears when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions.
CHECK GAS CAP
This message is displayed if the gas cap has not been
fully tightened. You should recheck your gas cap to
ensure that it is on properly. A few driving trips with the
cap properly installed should turn the display off.
KEY FOB BATT LOW
This message is displayed if the remote keyless entry
transmitter battery is low. See “Battery Replacement”
page 2-4.
CRUISE ENGAGED
This message is displayed when the cruise control
more information.
LOW COOLANT
If your vehicle has a 2.0L engine, this message is
displayed when there is a low level of engine coolant.
Have the cooling system serviced by your GM dealer as
soon as possible.
DOOR AJAR
This message is displayed if one or more of the
vehicle’s doors are not closed properly. When this
message appears, you should make sure that the door
is closed completely.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LOW FUEL
SERVICE AIR BAG
This message is displayed when your vehicle is low on
fuel. You should refill the tank as soon as possible.
This message is displayed when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Let only a qualified technician
work on your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced by
your GM dealer immediately.
LOW TRACTION
SERVICE VEHICLE
This message is displayed when the enhanced traction
system is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly. See Enhanced
information.
This message is displayed when a non-emissions
related powertrain malfunction occurs. Have your vehicle
serviced by your GM dealer as soon as possible.
TRUNK AJAR
This message is displayed when the trunk lid of your
vehicle is not closed completely. You should make sure
page 2-9.
PARKING BRAKE
This message is displayed if the parking brake is left
POWER STEERING
This message is displayed if a problem has been
detected with the electric power steering. Have your
vehicle serviced by your GM dealer immediately.
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Personalization Menu Modes
OIL-LIFE RESET
DIC Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle has personalization capabilities that allow
you to program certain features to a preferred setting.
All of the features listed may not be available on
your vehicle. Only the features available will be
displayed on your DIC.
When this feature is displayed, you can reset the engine
oil life system. To reset the system to 100%, press
and hold the reset button for at least one second. An
ACKNOWLEDGED display message will appear
for three seconds or until the next button is pressed.
This will tell you the system has been reset. See Engine
information.
The default settings for the features were set when your
vehicle left the factory, but may have been changed
from their default state since then.
To change feature settings, use the following procedure:
UNITS
Entering Personalization Menu
This feature allows you to select the units of
1. Turn the ignition on while the vehicle is stopped.
measurement in which the DIC will display the vehicle
information. When UNITS appears on the display, press
the reset button to scroll through the available settings:
2. Press the information and reset buttons at the same
time to enter the personalization menu.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes.
ENGLISH (default in United States): All information
will be displayed in English units. For example, distance
will be shown in miles (mi) and fuel economy in miles
per gallon (mpg).
Press the reset button to scroll through the available
settings for each mode.
If you do not make a selection within ten seconds,
the display will go back to the previous information
displayed.
METRIC (default in Canada): All information will be
displayed in metric units. For example, distance will be
shown in kilometers (km) and fuel economy in liters
per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ON: The horn will chirp on the first press of the unlock
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK HORN
If your vehicle has remote keyless entry, this feature,
which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp every time
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed, can be enabled or disabled. When LOCK
HORN appears on the display, press the reset button to
scroll through the available settings:
page 2-4 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp on the first press
of the remote keyless entry transmitter lock button.
The horn will still chirp on the second press.
LIGHT FLASH
If your vehicle has remote keyless entry, this feature,
which allows the vehicle’s exterior perimeter lighting to
flash every time the lock or unlock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed, can be
enabled or disabled. When LIGHT FLASH appears on
the display, press the reset button to scroll through
the available settings:
ON: The horn will chirp when the lock button on the
remote keyless entry transmitter is pressed.
page 2-4 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not flash when
the lock or unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed.
UNLOCK HORN
If your vehicle has remote keyless entry, this feature,
which allows the vehicle’s horn to chirp on the first press
of the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter, can be enabled or disabled. When UNLOCK
HORN appears on the display, press the reset button
to scroll through the available settings:
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will flash
when the lock or unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter is pressed.
page 2-4 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
OFF (default): The horn will not chirp when the
unlock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter
is pressed.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DELAY LOCK
AUTO UNLK
This feature, which allows the vehicle to automatically
unlock certain doors, can be enabled or disabled. When
AUTO UNLK appears on the display, press the reset
button to scroll through the available settings:
This feature, which delays the actual locking of the
vehicle, can be enabled or disabled. When DELAY
LOCK appears on the display, press the reset button to
scroll through the available settings:
ALL (default): All of the doors will automatically unlock.
DRIVER: The driver’s door will automatically unlock.
ON (default): The doors will not lock until five seconds
after the last door is closed. You can temporarily
override delayed locking by pressing the power lock
switch or the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter a second time.
NONE: None of the doors will automatically unlock. You
will need to manually unlock the doors.
If you have a manual transaxle vehicle, the door(s) will
automatically unlock when the ignition is turned off.
OFF: The doors will lock immediately when pressing
the power lock switch or the lock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter.
If you have an automatic transaxle vehicle, you
can select when the automatic unlocking will occur. See
“UNLK (Automatic Transaxle Only)” following.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNLK (Automatic Transaxle Only)
EXT LIGHTS
This screen displays only if your vehicle has an
automatic transaxle and DRIVER or ALL is selected for
the AUTO UNLK feature. This feature determines
when the automatic door unlocking will occur. When
UNLK appears on the display, press the reset button to
scroll through the available settings:
If your vehicle has remote keyless entry, this feature,
which allows the vehicle’s exterior perimeter lighting to
turn on each time the unlock button on the remote
keyless entry transmitter is pressed, can be enabled or
disabled. When EXT LIGHTS appears on the display,
press the reset button to scroll through the available
settings:
KEY OFF: The door(s) will unlock when the ignition is
turned off.
OFF: The exterior perimeter lighting will not turn on
when the unlock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter is pressed.
SHIFT TO P (default): The door(s) will unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
ON (default): The exterior perimeter lighting will turn on
when the unlock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed.
for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
page 2-4 for more information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SECURITY
LANGUAGE
If your vehicle has the remote keyless entry system, this
feature allows you to select the method used to arm
the vehicle’s security system. When SECURITY appears
on the display, press the reset button to scroll through
the available settings:
This feature allows you to select the language in which
the DIC will display. Press the reset button to scroll
through the available settings:
ENGLISH (default): The DIC will display all information
in English.
RKE (default): The content theft-deterrent system will
arm when the lock button on the remote keyless
entry transmitter is pressed or when the power door
lock switch is pressed.
FRENCH: The DIC will display all information
in French.
SPANISH: The DIC will display all information
in Spanish.
PASSIVE: The content theft-deterrent system will arm
itself 60 seconds after the ignition has been turned
off and all of the doors have been closed.
GERMAN: The DIC will display all information
in German.
information.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and exit out of the
personalization menu mode.
Choose one of the available settings and press the
information button to select it and move on to the
next feature.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Figure out which audio system is in your vehicle, find
out what your audio system can do, and how to operate
all of its controls.
Exiting Personalization Menu
The personalization menu will be exited when any of the
following conditions occur:
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be
played even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
• A ten second time period has elapsed.
• The ignition is turned off.
• The end of the personalization menu list is reached.
Audio System(s)
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, like a tape player, CB radio, mobile
telephone, or two-way radio, make sure that it can
be added by checking with your dealer. Also,
check federal rules covering mobile radio and
telephone units. If sound equipment can be added,
it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation
of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,
and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added improperly.
To set the hour, press the clock button. The clock
symbol will appear on the display and the hour number
will flash. Then turn the ADJ knob to increase or to
decrease. To set the minutes, press the clock button
again. The minute numbers will flash. Then turn the ADJ
knob to increase or to decrease. The time can be set
with the ignition on or off.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Radio with CD (Base Level)
To set the hour, press the clock button. The clock
symbol will appear on the display and the hour number
will flash. Then turn the ADJ knob to increase or to
decrease. To set the minutes, press the clock button
again. The minute numbers will flash. Then turn the ADJ
knob to increase or to decrease. The time can be set
with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the clock button to enter the clock set mode, then
press and hold the clock button for three seconds
until UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is
not available from the station, NO UPDATE will appear
on the display.
Playing the Radio
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch the display
between the time radio station frequency. When
the ignition is off, press this knob to display the time.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM), can
be programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons,
by performing the following steps:
To change the default on the display, press the
DISP knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce a
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
Finding a Station
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
and AM. The display will show the selection.
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
EQ (Tone): To adjust the bass or the treble, press and
release the EQ button until BASS or TREB appears
on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to increase or
to decrease. The display will show the bass or treble
level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds until you hear two beeps.
The radio will go to the first preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press either arrow again to stop
scanning presets.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BASS or TREB. Then press and hold the EQ button for
more than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
the level will be adjusted to the middle position.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the tone controls to the middle position, first
end out of tone by pressing another button, causing
the radio to perform that function, or by waiting
five seconds for the display to return to the default
display. Then press and hold the EQ button for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN will appear
on the display.
To adjust the speaker controls to the middle position,
first end out of balance and fade by pressing another
button, causing the radio to perform that function, or by
waiting five seconds for the display to return to the
default display. Then press and hold the balance/fade
button for more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
CEN will appear on the display.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Radio Messages
CAL (Calibration): The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that the radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to your GM dealer for service.
x w (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release
the balance/fade button until BAL appears on the
display. Then turn the ADJ knob to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
LOCK: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your GM dealer for service.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the balance/fade button
until FADE appears on the display. Then turn the
ADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position,
select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold the
balance/fade button for more than two seconds. You will
hear a beep and the level will be adjusted to the
middle position.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the DISP knob.
1 r (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing, where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
2 [ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. You will hear
sound at a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs without an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
5 y (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. T# and
RDM will appear on the display. Press RDM again
to turn off random play, OFF will appear on the display.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
6 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to
hear a track over again. RPT will appear on the display.
The current track will continue to repeat. Press RPT
again to turn off repeat play, OFF will appear on
the display.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds. Press the right arrow to go to the next
track. The track number will appear on the display. If
either arrow is pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
CD Messages
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
If either arrow is held for more then two seconds, the CD
will enter CD scan mode and the CD will play the first
10 seconds of each track. Press this button again to stop
scanning.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see the current
track number or the elapsed time of the track.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
To change the default on the display, press this knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. You will hear a beep and the
selected display will now be the default.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
B (CD): Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the ignition and radio off if this
button is pressed first.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Radio with CD (Up Level)
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display. RDS
stations may also provide the time of day, a program
type (PTY) for current programming, and the name
of the program being broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers
100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
digital quality audio and text information that includes
song title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISP (Display): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
Playing the Radio
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
For RDS, press the DISP knob to change what appears
on the display. The display options are station name,
RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name of the
program (if available).
and off.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob, while in
XM™ mode, to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
AUTO u (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW,
AUTO VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Then as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. AUTO VOL NONE will appear on
the display if the radio cannot determine the vehicle
speed or if the engine is not running. To turn automatic
volume off, press this button until AUTO VOL OFF
appears on the display.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce a beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds until you hear two beeps.
The radio will go to the first preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press either arrow again to stop
scanning presets.
EQ (Tone): To adjust the bass or the treble, press and
release the EQ button until BASS or TREBLE appears
on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to increase or to
decrease. The display will show the bass or treble level.
If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BASS or TREBLE. Then press and hold the EQ button
for more than two seconds. You will hear a beep
and the level will be adjusted to the middle position.
Setting Preset Stations
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
To adjust the tone controls to the middle position, first
end out of tone by pressing another button, causing
the radio to perform that function, or by waiting
five seconds for the display to return to the default
display. Then press and hold the EQ button for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. ALL
CENTERED will appear on the display.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
x w (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release
the balance/fade button until BAL appears on the
display. Then turn the ADJ knob to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. PTY and a program type will
appear on the display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the balance/fade button
until FADE appears on the display. Then turn the
ADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK left arrow to select the PTY and to take
you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY press the
SEEK left arrow again. If the radio cannot find the
desired PTY, NONE FOUND will appear on the
display and the radio will return to the last station
you were listening to.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position,
select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold the
balance/fade button for more than two seconds. You will
hear a beep and the level will be adjusted to the
middle position.
After 15 seconds of inactivity or if the P-TYPE
button is pressed again, the radio will exit program
type select mode.
To adjust the speaker controls to the middle position,
first end out of balance and fade by pressing another
button, causing the radio to perform that function, or by
waiting five seconds for the display to return to the
default display. Then press and hold the balance/fade
button for more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
ALL CENTERED will appear on the display.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
message has been displayed, MSG will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the MSG button. You can view the last message until a
new message is received or a different station is
tuned to.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
When a message is not available from a station, NO
MESSAGE will appear on the display.
Radio Messages
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
on the display, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must
be returned to your GM dealer for service.
MSG (Message): If the current station has a message,
MSG will appear on the display. Press this button to
see the message. The message may display the artist,
song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your GM dealer for service.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the MSG
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature not
available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title not
available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Lock
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message
appears after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Check DAB
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the DISP knob.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 r (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on the CD will start playing, where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
2 [ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. You will hear
sound at a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to
play the passage. The elapsed time of the track will
appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs without an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
5 y (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM ON will appear on the display.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in random, to take you to the
previous or next track in sequential order.
Press RDM again to turn off random play, RANDOM
OFF will appear on the display.
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. TRACK, the track
number, and the elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display. To change the default on the display,
time or elapsed time, press this knob until you see the
display you want, then hold the knob for two seconds.
The radio will produce one beep and the selected
display will now be the default.
6 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear a
track over again. REPEAT ON and the repeat symbol
will appear on the display. The current track will continue
to repeat.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in repeat, to take you to the
previous or next track.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play, REPEAT OFF
will appear on the display.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a CD. The equalization will be automatically recalled
whenever a CD is played. For more information,
see AUTO EQ listed previously in this section.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds. Press the right arrow to go to the
next track. The track number will appear on the display.
If either arrow is pressed more than once, the player
will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
If either arrow is held for more then two seconds, the
CD will enter CD scan mode and the CD will play
the first 10 seconds of each track. Press this button
again to stop scanning.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CD or to
access a remote device (if installed) when listening
to the radio.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Messages
Radio with CD (MP3)
CHECK DISC: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
Radio Data System (RDS)
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
Playing the Radio
O (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
u (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display. RDS
stations may also provide the time of day, a program
type (PTY) for current programming, and the name
of the program being broadcast.
AUTO u (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system adjusts automatically to make
up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AUTO VOL LOW,
AUTO VOL MEDIUM, or AUTO VOL HIGH will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will allow for
more volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds.
Then as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. AUTO VOL NONE will appear on
the display if the radio cannot determine the vehicle
speed or if the engine is not running. To turn automatic
volume off, press this button until AUTO VOL OFF
appears on the display.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States. XM™ offers
100 coast-to-coast channels including music, news,
sports, talk, and children’s programming. XM™ provides
digital quality audio and text information that includes
song title and artist name. A service fee is required
in order to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISP (Display): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
For RDS, press the DISP knob to change what appears
on the display. The display options are station name,
RDS station frequency, PTY, and the name of the
program (if available).
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to select radio stations.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the DISP knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
© SEEK ¨: Press the right or the left arrow to
go to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce a beep
and the selected display will now be the default.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either arrow
for more than four seconds until you hear two beeps.
The radio will go to the first preset station stored on the
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next preset station. Press either arrow again to stop
scanning presets.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programmed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
EQ (Tone): To adjust the bass or the treble, press and
release the EQ button until BASS or TREBLE appears
on the display. Turn the ADJ knob to increase or to
decrease. The display will show the bass or treble level.
If a station is weak or noisy, decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1
or XM2.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BASS or TREBLE. Then press and hold the EQ button
for more than two seconds. You will hear a beep
and the level will be adjusted to the middle position.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization.
To adjust the tone controls to the middle position, first
end out of tone by pressing another button, causing
the radio to perform that function, or by waiting
five seconds for the display to return to the default
display. Then press and hold the EQ button for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. ALL
CENTERED will appear on the display.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever that
numbered pushbutton is pressed, the station
that was set will return and the equalization that
was selected will be stored for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
x w (Balance/Fade): To adjust the balance between
the right and the left speakers, press and release
the balance/fade button until BAL appears on the
display. Then turn the ADJ knob to move the sound
toward the right or the left speakers.
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program
type select mode. PTY and a program type will
appear on the display.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release the balance/fade button
until FADE appears on the display. Then turn the
ADJ knob to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
2. Turn the ADJ knob to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press the
SEEK left arrow to select the PTY and to take
you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY press the
SEEK left arrow again. If the radio cannot find the
desired PTY, NONE FOUND will appear on the
display and the radio will return to the last station
you were listening to.
To adjust the balance or the fade to the middle position,
select BAL or FADE. Then press and hold the
balance/fade button for more than two seconds. You will
hear a beep and the level will be adjusted to the
middle position.
After 15 seconds of inactivity or if the P-TYPE
button is pressed again, the radio will exit program
type select mode.
To adjust the speaker controls to the middle position,
first end out of balance and fade by pressing another
button, causing the radio to perform that function, or by
waiting five seconds for the display to return to the
default display. Then press and hold the balance/fade
button for more than two seconds until you hear a beep.
ALL CENTERED will appear on the display.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, MSG will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the MSG button. You can view the last message until a
new message is received or a different station is
tuned to.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is low or
a CD is playing. If a CD is playing, play will stop during
the announcement. Alert announcements cannot be
turned off.
When a message is not available from a station, NO
MESSAGE will appear on the display.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
Radio Messages
CALIBRATE: The audio system has been calibrated for
your vehicle from the factory. If CALIBRATE appears
on the display, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must
be returned to your GM dealer for service.
MSG (Message): If the current station has a message,
MSG will appear on the display. Press this button to
see the message. The message may display the artist,
song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the MSG
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio. Take
the vehicle to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating
encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and
no action is required. This process should take no longer
than 30 seconds.
No Signal
Loading XM
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move
into an open area, the signal should return.
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This message should
disappear shortly.
Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavl
Channel no
longer available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the
presets, choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
XM Lock
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message
appears after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Check DAB
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
Playing a CD
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing. If
you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the DISP knob.
1 r (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. The sound will be muted.
Release this pushbutton to play the passage. The
elapsed time of the track will appear on the display.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
2 [ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. The sound will be
muted. Release this pushbutton to play the passage.
The elapsed time of the track will appear on the display.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on the CD will start playing, where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
5 y (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order.
RANDOM ON will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs without an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in random, to take you to the
previous or next track in sequential order.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
Press RDM again to turn off random play, RANDOM
OFF will appear on the display.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. TRACK, the track
number, and the elapsed time of the track will appear
on the display. To change the default on the display,
time or elapsed time, press this knob until you see the
display you want, then hold the knob for two seconds.
The radio will produce one beep and the selected
display will now be the default.
6 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear a
track over again. REPEAT ON and the repeat symbol
will appear on the display. The current track will continue
to repeat.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in repeat, to take you to the
previous or next track.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play, REPEAT OFF
will appear on the display.
MSG (Message): Press this button to display the text
on commercially recorded CDs (if available).
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track if it has been playing for more than
eight seconds. Press the right arrow to go to the
next track. The track number will appear on the display.
If either arrow is pressed more than once, the player
will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a CD. The equalization will be automatically recalled
whenever a CD is played. For more information,
see AUTO EQ listed previously in this section.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
If either arrow is held for more then two seconds, the
CD will enter CD scan mode and the CD will play
the first 10 seconds of each track. Press this button
again to stop scanning.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CD or to
access a remote device (if installed) when listening
to the radio.
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to go to the previous or
next track(s). Stop turning this knob to play the track.
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Root Directory
Using an MP3 CD
MP3 Format
The root directory will be treated as a folder. If the root
directory has compressed audio files, the directory
will be displayed as F1 ROOT. All files contained directly
under the root directory will be accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) will always
be accessed before root folders or files.
This MP3 player will accept MP3 files that were recorded
on an up to 700 MB CD-R CD. The files can be
recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kpbs,
40 kpbs, 56 kpbs, 64 kpbs, 80 kpbs, 96 kpbs,
112 kpbs, 128 kpbs, 160 kpbs, 192 kpbs, 224 kpbs,
256 kpbs, and 320 kpbs or a variable bit rate. Song title,
artist name, and album will be available when recorded
using ID3 tags version 1.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in the
file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no
compressed files directly beneath them, the player will
advance to the next folder in the file structure that
contains compressed audio files and the empty folder
will not be displayed or numbered.
The player will be able to read and play a maximum of
50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and 255 files.
Long file, folder, or playlist names or a combination of a
large number of files and folders or playlists may
cause the player to be unable to play up to the
maximum number of files, folders, playlists, or sessions.
If you wish to play large numbers of files, folders,
playlists or sessions minimize the length of the file,
folder or playlist name. You can also play an MP3 CD
that was recorded using no file folders. The system can
support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keep the
depth of the folders to a minimum in order to keep down
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a
particular folder during playback. If a CD contains more
than the maximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists,
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
will be located under the root folder. The next and
previous folder functions will have no function on a
CD that was recorded without folders or playlists. When
displaying the name of the folder the radio will
display ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files will be located under
the root folder. The folder down and the folder up
buttons will search playlists (Px) first and then go to the
root folder. When the radio displays the name of the
folder the radio will display ROOT.
10 sessions, and 255 files the player will let you access
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum will be ignored.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks will be played in the following order:
You can access preprogrammed playlists which were
created by WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real
Jukebox™ software, however, you will not have editing
capability. These playlists will be treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• Play will begin from the first track in the first playlist
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has been played, play will continue from the first
track of the first folder.
• Play will begin from the first track in the first folder
and will continue sequentially through all tracks in
each folder. When the last track of the last
folder has been played, play will continue from the
first track of the first playlist.
Playing an MP3
With the ignition on, insert a CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull it in, and READING
DISC will appear on the display. The CD should begin
playing and the CD symbol will appear on the display.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first press
the eject button or the DISP knob.
When play enters a new folder, the display will not
automatically show the new folder name unless
you have chosen the folder mode as the default display.
See DISP later in this section for more information.
The new track name will appear on the display.
If you turn off the ignition or radio with a CD in the
player it will stay in the player. When you turn on the
ignition or radio, the CD will start to play where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
File System and Naming
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
The song name that will be displayed will be the song
name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name
is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio will
display the file name without the extension (such as
.mp3) as the track name.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm) single
CDs without an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
will be shortened. The display will not show parts
of words on the last page of text and the extension of
the filename will not be displayed.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If playing a CD-R the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur try a
known good CD.
3 ! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to
the first track in the previous folder. Pressing this
pushbutton while in folder random mode will take you to
the previous folder and random the tracks in that folder.
4 # (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to go to the
first track in the next folder. Pressing this pushbutton
while in folder random mode will take you to the
next folder and random the tracks in that folder.
Do not add paper labels to CDs, they could get caught
in the CD player.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
5 y (Random): To random the tracks in the current
folder or playlist, press and release this pushbutton.
FLDR RANDOM ON or PLST RANDOM ON will appear
on the display. Once all of the tracks in the current
folder or playlist have been played, the system will move
on to the next folder or playlist and play all of the
tracks in random order.
1 r (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
eight times the normal playing speed. Release
this pushbutton to play the track. REV and the elapsed
time of the track will appear on the display.
When in random, pressing and releasing either SEEK
arrow will take you to the next or previous random track.
2 [ (Fast Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton
to advance quickly within a track. Press and hold
this pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
eight times the normal playing speed. Release this
pushbutton to play the track. FWD and the elapsed time
of the track will appear on the display.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in random, to take you to
the previous or next track in sequential order.
Press and release this pushbutton again to turn off
random play, RANDOM OFF will appear on the display.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
name, pressing this knob within two seconds will take
you to the next page of text. If there are no other pages
to be shown, pressing this knob within two seconds
will take you to the next display mode.
6 N (Repeat): Press this pushbutton once to hear a
track over again. TRACK REPEAT ON or FLDR
REPEAT ON and the repeat symbol will appear on the
display. The current track will continue to repeat.
To change the default on the display, press the DISP
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
this knob for two seconds.
Turn the ADJ knob, while in repeat, to take you to the
previous or next track.
Press RPT again to turn off repeat play, REPEAT OFF
will appear on the display.
MSG (Message): MSG will appear on the display
whenever a current track has ID3 tag information. Press
this button to display the artist name and album
contained in the tag. MSG will disappear from the
display when the information in the ID3 tag has finished.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the previous track. Press the right arrow to go to the
start of the next track.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
To scan tracks, press either arrow for more than
two seconds to enter CD scan mode. The CD will play
the first 10 seconds of each track. Press either arrow
again to stop scanning.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to play a CD or to
access a remote device (if installed) when listening
to the radio.
ADJ (Adjust): Turn this knob to go to the previous or
next track(s). Stop turning this knob to play the track.
DISP (Display): Press this knob to switch between
track and name, folder and name, and the elapsed time
of the track. The display will show only eight characters,
but there can be up to four pages of text. If there are
more than eight characters in the song, folder, or playlist
Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject may
be activated with either the ignition or radio off. CDs
may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
CD Messages
CHECK DISC: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically by
learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it
will not operate and LOCK or LOCKED will appear on
the display.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
• The format of the CD may not be compatible. See
“MP3 Format” earlier in this section.
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1–6 (Preset Pushbuttons): Press this button to play
stations that are programmed on the radio preset
pushbuttons. The radio will only seek preset stations
with a strong signal that are in the selected band.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
x u w (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease the volume.
> (Mute): Press this button to silence the system.
Press this button again, or any other radio button, to turn
the sound on.
Mute is unavailable when OnStar™ (if equipped)
is active.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include
the following:
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
listening to the radio and a CD. The inactive CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
x SEEK w: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere with each other. Static
can occur on AM stations caused by things like
storms and power lines. Try reducing the treble to
reduce this noise.
When a CD is playing, press the up or the down arrow
to go to the next or previous track.
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped).
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FM Stereo
Care of the CD Player
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals will
reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall
buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing
the sound to fade in and out.
The use of CD lens cleaners for CD players is not
advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the
CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Fixed Mast Antenna
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast to coast. Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. The radio may
display NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten
by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
Care of Your CDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the surface of a CD is soiled,
dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent
solution and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling CDs. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges
or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
The performance of the XM system may be affected if
the sunroof is open.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
proper defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a passenger to
help do things like this, or pull off the road in a safe place
to do them yourself. These simple defensive driving
techniques could save your life.
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
Drunken Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads, or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a
vehicle:
• Judgment
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
• Muscular Coordination
• Vision
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It is the best defensive driving maneuver, in
both city and rural driving. You never know when the
vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn suddenly.
• Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the driving
task — such as concentrating on a cellular telephone call,
reading, or reaching for something on the floor — makes
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological and
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and
then drive. But what if people do? How much is “too
much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less
than many might think. Although it depends on each
person and situation, here is some general information
on the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before and
during drinking
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example, if
the same person drank three double martinis (3 ounces
or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour, the person’s
BAC would be close to 0.12 percent. A person
who consumes food just before or during drinking will
have a somewhat lower BAC level.
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the street?
A person with even a moderate BAC might not be able to
react quickly enough to avoid the collision.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen, it
depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks, and
how quickly the person drinks them.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person’s system can make crash injuries
worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or
heart. This means that when anyone who has been
drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that
person’s chance of being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not been drinking.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Braking
{CAUTION:
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Control of a Vehicle
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
You have three systems that make your vehicle go
where you want it to go. They are the brakes, the
steering, and the accelerator. All three systems have to
do their work at the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it
is easy to ask more of those control systems than
the tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle. See Enhanced Traction System
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
advanced electronic braking system that will help
prevent a braking skid.
If your vehicle has anti-lock
brakes, this warning light
on the instrument panel will
come on briefly when
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
you start your vehicle.
When you start your engine, or when you begin to drive
away, your anti-lock brake system will check itself.
You may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on, and you may even notice that
your brake pedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down. If
one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze the
brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear or
feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
anti-lock brakes, it is different. See Anti-Lock Brake
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
a slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
Enhanced Traction System (ETS)
If you have anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at
the same time. However, if you do not have anti-lock
brakes, your first reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard
and hold it down — may be the wrong thing to do.
Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle
cannot respond to your steering. Momentum will
carry it in whatever direction it was headed when the
wheels stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into
the very thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
Your vehicle may have an Enhanced Traction System
(ETS) that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only if
it senses that one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power and may
also upshift the transaxle to limit wheel spin. You
may feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
A LOW TRACTION message will appear on the
Driver Information Center (DIC) when the traction control
system is actively limiting wheel spin. Slippery road
conditions may exist if this message is displayed,
so adjust your driving accordingly.
If you do not have anti-lock brakes, use a “squeeze”
braking technique. This will give you maximum braking
while maintaining steering control. You can do this
by pushing on the brake pedal with steadily increasing
pressure.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the Enhanced
Traction System begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-10.
The Enhanced Traction System warning light may come
on for the following reasons:
• If you turn the system off by moving the shift lever
to FIRST (1), the warning light will come on and
stay on. To turn the system back on, move the shift
lever back to a position other than FIRST (1).
The warning light should go off.
When the system is on,
this warning light will come
on to let you know
• The warning light will come on when you set your
parking brake with the engine running, and it will
stay on if your parking brake does not release fully.
If the transaxle shift lever is in any position other
than FIRST (1) and the warning light stays on after
your parking brake is fully released, it means
there is a problem with the system.
there’s a problem.
• If the traction control system is affected by an
engine related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
If the warning light stays on, or comes on when you’re
driving, there may be a problem with your Enhanced
Traction System and your vehicle may need service.
When this warning light is on, the system will not
limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
If the Enhanced Traction System warning light comes
on and stays on for an extended period of time when the
transaxle shift lever is in any position other than
FIRST (1), your vehicle needs service.
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
Steering
Electric Power Steering
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the power
steering assist system will continue to operate until you
are able to stop your vehicle. If you lose power
steering assist because the electric power steering
system is not functioning, you can steer, but it will take
more effort.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject to
the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction. If
you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice, you
will understand this.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time, you
may notice a reduced amount of power steering
assist. The normal amount of power steering assist
should return shortly after a few normal steering
movements.
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While
you are in a curve, speed is the one factor you
can control.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems and/or the POWER STEERING message
comes on, contact your dealer for service repairs. See
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Both control
systems — steering and braking — have to do their work
where the tires meet the road. Unless you have
four-wheel anti-lock brakes, adding the hard braking can
demand too much of those places. You can lose control.
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The same thing can happen if you are steering through
a sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those
two control systems — steering and acceleration — can
overwhelm those places where the tires meet the
road and make you lose control. See Enhanced Traction
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes — but, unless you
have anti-lock, not enough to lock your wheels.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped
off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while
you’re driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel at
the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you
can turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer
quickly, and just as quickly straighten the wheel
once you have avoided the object.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to go
straight down the roadway.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For one
thing, following too closely reduces your area of
vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
do not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a running start that more than makes up
for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass, wait
for a better time.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front
in your inside mirror, activate your right lane
change signal and move back into the right lane.
Remember that your right outside mirror is convex.
The vehicle you just passed may seem to be
farther away from you than it really is.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing, it
may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
If you have the Enhanced Traction System (ETS),
remember: It helps to avoid only the acceleration skid.
do not have the Enhanced Traction System, or if the
system is off, then an acceleration skid is also best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
If you have the anti-lock braking system (ABS),
remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. If you do
not have ABS, then in a braking skid, where the
wheels are no longer rolling, release enough pressure
on the brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This
restores steering control. Push the brake pedal down
steadily when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the
wheels are rolling, you will have steering control.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety, you
will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
Driving at Night
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime. But
as we get older these differences increase. A
50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your
night vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your
eyes will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They
may cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even several
seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark. When
you are faced with severe glare, as from a driver
who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle with
misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep
your eyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a wet
road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as on
dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise to
go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and
traffic signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road,
and even people walking.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipment in
good shape and keep your windshield washer tank filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper
inserts when they show signs of streaking or missing
areas on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start to
separate from the inserts.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you cannot, try to slow down before
you hit them.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing
on the road. If you can see reflections from trees,
telephone poles, or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple
the water’s surface, there could
Driving Through Flowing Water
{CAUTION:
be hydroplaning.
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as you
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle can
be carried away. As little as six inches of
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
flowing water can carry away a smaller vehicle.
If this happens, you and other vehicle
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle. If
you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
on page 5-54.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
City Driving
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
Freeway Driving
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to the
freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as you
drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin to check
traffic. Try to determine where you expect to blend with
the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close to the
prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal, check your
mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as often as
necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,
parkways, expressways, turnpikes, or
superhighways — are the safest of all roads.
But they have their own special rules.
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain you
allow a reasonable following distance.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course, you
will find experienced and able service experts in GM
dealerships all across North America. They will be ready
and willing to help if you need it.
Expect to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, do
not, under any circumstances, stop and back up. Drive
on to the next exit.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full? Are
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. Reduce your speed
according to your speedometer, not to your sense
of motion. After driving for any distance at higher
speeds, you may tend to think you are going slower
than you actually are.
all windows clean inside and outside?
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to the
recommended pressure?
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles that
first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on the
road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of the
wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy. Do
not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis? First, be
aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your rearview mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
{CAUTION:
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or long hill.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
{CAUTION:
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down to
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There could
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
If you do not shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area, or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And,
if you will be driving under severe conditions, include
a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your trunk.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall. Try
to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You
will have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
If you have the Enhanced Traction System, keep the
transaxle shift lever in AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) so
the system will be able to improve your ability to
accelerate when driving on a slippery road. Even though
your vehicle has this system, you will want to slow
down and adjust your driving to the road conditions.
Under certain conditions, you may want to turn the
traction system off, such as when driving through deep
snow and loose gravel, to help maintain vehicle
motion at lower speeds. See Enhanced Traction
If you do not have the Enhanced Traction System,
accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction. If
you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin
and polish the surface under the tires even more.
Unless you have the anti-lock braking system (ABS),
you will want to brake very gently, too. If you do
page 4-6. This system improves your vehicle’s stability
when you make a hard stop on a slippery road.
Whether you have ABS or not, you will want to begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Without ABS, if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let
up on the brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down
steadily to get the most traction you can.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake so hard
that your wheels stop rolling, you will just slide. Brake
so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.
• Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On
an otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such
as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve
or an overpass may remain icy when the
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch of
ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it. Try not
to brake while you are actually on the ice, and
avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see it
or smell it, so you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from around the
base of your vehicle, especially any that is
blocking your exhaust pipe. And check around
again from time to time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get and
it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of the
vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can. To help
keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle and do
some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour or so until
help comes.
speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle back
and forth, you can destroy your transaxle. See
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as rocking
can help you get out when you are stuck, but you
must use caution.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transaxle, between FIRST (1) or
SECOND (2) and REVERSE (R), spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal while
you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle. If
that does not get you out after a few tries, you may
need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out,
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it may properly
carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the
Certification label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the
tire size of the original equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more
Tire and Loading Information Label
There is also important loading information on the
Certification label. It tells you the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle; see “Certification
Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX pounds” on your vehicle placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). With
the driver’s door open, you will find the label either
attached above the door lock post for a two door vehicle
or below the door lock post for a four door vehicle.
The tire and loading information label shows the number
of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Example 1
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight =
Item
Total
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing a
important information on towing a trailer, towing
safety rules, and trailering tips.
B
C
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract Occupant
Weight 150 lbs
(68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Subtract Occupant
Weight 200 lbs
(91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
B
C
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information
label for specific information about your vehicle’s
capacity weight and seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should
never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Certification Label
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
A vehicle specific Certification label, found on the rear
edge of the driver’s door, tells you the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed
the GVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Towing
{CAUTION:
Towing Your Vehicle
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service if
you need to have your disabled vehicle towed. See
• Put things in the trunk or rear area of your
vehicle. In a trunk, put them as far forward
as you can. Try to spread the weight
evenly. If you have fold-down rear seats,
you will find four anchors on the back wall
of your trunk. You can use these anchors
to tie down lighter loads. They are not
strong enough for heavy things, however,
so put them as far forward as you can in
the trunk or rear area.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle — such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your
vehicle with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly
towing” (towing your vehicle with two wheels on
the ground and two wheels up on a device known
as a “dolly”).
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
Dinghy Towing
You may dinghy tow your vehicle from the front following
these steps:
• What is the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you
will want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-22.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC to unlock the
steering wheel.
3. Shift your transaxle to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Release the parking brake.
Notice: If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while
towing your vehicle, it could be damaged. Never
exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing
Your vehicle cannot be dolly towed, but can be dinghy
towed. See “Dinghy Towing” earlier in this section.
Notice: Dolly towing your vehicle may cause
damage because of reduced ground clearance.
Always tow your vehicle using the dinghy towing
procedure listed in this section or put your vehicle
on a flatbed truck.
Towing a Trailer (Manual Transaxle)
Do not tow a trailer if your vehicle is equipped with a
manual transaxle.
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered by
the warranty. Never have your vehicle towed from
the rear.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with an
automatic transaxle and the proper trailer towing
equipment. If your vehicle is not equipped as stated
above, do not tow a trailer. To identify what the vehicle
trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should
read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability
and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes
correct equipment, and it has to be used properly.
Towing a Trailer (Automatic
Transaxle)
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. You may also damage your
vehicle; the resulting repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer only if
you have followed all the steps in this section.
Ask your dealer for advice and information
about towing a trailer with your vehicle.
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that of
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. Also,
the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
• The total weight on your vehicle’s tires
Weight of the Trailer
but also where you will be driving. A good source
for this information can be state or provincial police.
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
• Consider using a sway control. You can ask a hitch
dealer about sway controls.
It should never weigh more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg). But
even that can be too heavy.
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 1,000 miles
(1 600 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. And, it can also depend
on any special equipment that you have on your vehicle.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your vehicle
wear in at the heavier loads.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted
speed for trailers, or no more than 55 mph
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
(90 km/h), to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
In Canada write to:
• Do not tow when the outside air temperature is
above 100°F (38°C).
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
• Do not tow more than 1,000 miles (1 600 km)
per year.
Oshawa, Ontario, L1H 8P7
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers, or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will also
reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow. And if you
tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load to the
GVW because your vehicle will be carrying that weight,
more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total
loaded trailer weight (B).
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Safety Chains
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper limit
for cold tires. You will find these numbers on the
Tire-Loading Information label. See Loading Your
the GVW limit for your vehicle, including the weight
of the trailer tongue.
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to
the road if it becomes separated from the hitch.
Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the
hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer.
Follow the manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains and do not attach them to the bumper.
Always leave just enough slack so you can turn
with your rig. And, never allow safety chains to drag on
the ground.
Hitches
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads are
a few reasons why you will need the right hitch. Here
are some rules to follow:
Trailer Brakes
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended for
hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
Does your trailer have its own brakes? Be sure to read
and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so
you will be able to install, adjust and maintain them
properly. Do not try to tap into your vehicle’s brake
system. If you do, both brake systems will not work well,
or at all.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If
you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
you remove the hitch. If you do not seal them,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-29. Dirt and water can also enter
the vehicle.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
4-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged. Avoid
making very sharp turns while trailering.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid
jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring. Check
with your dealer. The arrows on your instrument
panel will flash whenever you signal a turn or lane
change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps will also
flash, telling other drivers you are about to turn,
change lanes or stop.
Passing
You will need more passing distance up ahead when
you are towing a trailer. And, because the vehicle
is a good deal longer, you will need to go much farther
beyond the passed vehicle before you can return to
your lane.
4-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It
is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
Driving on Grades
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher
than normal engine and transaxle temperatures may
result and damage your vehicle. Frequent stops
are very important to allow the engine and transaxle
to cool.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here is
how to do it:
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P) for an automatic transaxle, or into
gear for a manual transaxle. When parking uphill,
turn your wheels away from the curb. When parking
downhill, turn your wheels into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks under the
trailer wheels.
Pay attention to the engine coolant gage. If the indicator
is in the red area, turn off the air conditioning to
page 5-29.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift into PARK (P) for
an automatic transaxle or REVERSE (R) for
a manual transaxle.
5. Release the regular brakes.
4-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down
while you:
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you are
page 6-4 for more on this. Things that are especially
important in trailer operation are automatic transaxle
fluid (do not overfill), engine oil, drive belt, cooling
system and brake system.
• Start your engine.
• Shift into a gear.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the Index
will help you find them quickly. If you are trailering,
it is a good idea to review this information before you
start your trip.
• Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
page 5-29.
4-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Service
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
will want to use the proper service manual. It tells
you much more about how to service your vehicle than
this manual can. To order the proper service manual,
page 7-11.
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
do your own service work, see Servicing Your
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Equipment to the Outside of Gasoline Octane
Your Vehicle
If your vehicle has the 2.2L L4 engine, use regular
unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of 87 or higher.
If the octane is less than 87, you may get a heavy
knocking noise when you drive. If this occurs, use a
gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. Otherwise, you might damage your engine. A
little pinging noise when you accelerate or drive
uphill is considered normal. This does not indicate a
problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is necessary.
If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane fuel and
hear heavy knocking, your engine needs service.
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This may cause wind
noise and affect windshield washer performance. Check
with your dealer before adding equipment to the
outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the 2.0L L4 Supercharged engine,
use premium unleaded gasoline with a posted octane of
91 or higher for best performance. You may also use
middle grade or regular unleaded gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, but your vehicle’s acceleration may
be slightly reduced. If the octane is less than 87, you
may get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 3-30. If this occurs, return to your authorized GM
dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by automobile manufacturers
around the world and contained in the World-Wide Fuel
Charter which is available from the Alliance of
Automobile Manufacturers at
www.autoalliance.org/fuel_charter.htm. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, you should not have to add
anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
General Motors recommends that you buy gasolines
that are advertised to help keep fuel injectors and intake
valves clean. If your vehicle experiences problems
due to dirty injectors or valves, try a different brand of
gasoline. Also, your GM dealer has additives that
will help correct and prevent most deposit-related
problems.
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards, your
vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction indicator
lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail a
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly if
they comply with the specifications described earlier.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer
for service.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can
cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to
you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right.
While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the
hook on the fuel door.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damage your fuel tank and emissions
page 3-30.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The
diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. This would allow fuel
to evaporate into the atmosphere. See Malfunction
The CHECK GAS CAP message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap is not
properly installed. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-37 for more information.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury to
you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed, or
on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following.
1. Pull the interior hood
release lever with this
symbol on it. It is
located under the
instrument panel on
the driver’s side of
the vehicle.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and push the
secondary hood release lever to the left. It is
located under the front center of the hood toward
the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. After you have partially lifted the hood, a gas strut
will automatically take over to lift and hold the hood
in the fully open position.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Lower the hood until the lifting force
of the strut is reduced, then release the hood to
latch fully. Check to make sure the hood is closed
and repeat the process if necessary.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
page 5-40.
B. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
on page 5-40.
C. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking
page 5-31.
D. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
on page 5-23.
I. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When you open the hood on the 2.0L L4 Supercharged engine, here is what you will see:
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See “Adding
Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer Fluid
on page 5-35.
Engine Oil
Checking Engine Oil
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
E. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
on page 5-23.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
page 5-40.
on page 5-40.
page 5-31.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is at or below the MIN mark, then you will need
to add at least one quart of oil. But you must use the
right kind. This section explains what kind of oil to use.
For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities
2.2L L4 Engine
2.0L L4 Supercharged
Engine
the location of the engine oil fill cap.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If your engine has
so much oil that the oil level gets above the upper
mark that shows the proper operating range,
your engine could be damaged.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• SAE 5W-30
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
For Vehicles With the 2.2L L4 Engine Only
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
For Vehicles with the 2.0L L4
Supercharged Engine Only
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Look for two things:
• GM4718M
Your vehicle’s engine requires a special oil meeting
GM Standard GM4718M. Oils meeting this
standard may be identified as synthetic. However,
not all synthetic oils will meet this GM standard.
You should look for and use only an oil that meets
GM Standard GM4718M.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use oils that do not have the
GM4718M Standard designation, you can cause
engine damage not covered by your warranty.
Your vehicle’s engine is filled at the factory with a
Mobil 1® synthetic oil, which meets all requirements for
your vehicle.
• SAE 5W-30
Substitute Engine Oil: When adding oil to maintain
engine oil level, oil meeting GM Standard GM4718M
may not be available. You can add substitute oil
designated SAE 5W-30 with the starburst symbol at all
temperatures. Substitute oil not meeting GM Standard
GM4718M should not be used for an oil change.
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Engine Oil Additives
Oils meeting these
requirements should also
have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol that meet GM standards
are all you will need for good performance and engine
protection.
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions,
the mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can
vary considerably. For the oil life system to work
properly, you must reset the system every time the
oil is changed.
You should look for this on the oil container, and use
only those oils that are identified as meeting GM
Standard GM4718M and have the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil container.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
After changing the engine oil, the system must be reset
as follows:
necessary. A CHANGE OIL SOON message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) will come on. See DIC
your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the oil life system may not
indicate that an oil change is necessary for over a year.
However, your engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your dealer has GM-trained service people who
will perform this work using genuine GM parts and reset
the system. It is also important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
1. Turn the ignition to RUN, with the engine off.
2. Press the information and reset buttons on the DIC
at the same time to enter the personalization menu.
3. Press the information button to scroll through the
available personalization menu modes until the
DIC display shows OIL-LIFE RESET.
4. Press and hold the reset button until the DIC
display shows ACKNOWLEDGED. This will tell you
the system has been reset.
5. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
If the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the reset procedure.
What to Do with Used Oil
How to Reset the Engine Oil
Life System
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good
hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or
rags containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use.
Anytime your oil is changed, reset the system so it can
calculate when the next oil change is required. If a
situation occurs where you change your oil prior to a
CHANGE OIL SOON message being turned on,
reset the system.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it
in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by
taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have a
problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling center
for help.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from the
vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release loose
dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with dirt, a new
filter is required.
2.2L L4 engine
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
50,000 miles (83 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for more information. If you are driving
in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine
oil change.
2.2L L4 engine
To inspect or replace the filter, remove the screws that
hold the cover on and lift off the cover. Be sure to
reinstall the cover tightly.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.0L L4 Supercharged engine
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
There is a special procedure for inspecting and replacing
the filter. Because this procedure is difficult, you
should have it done at your dealer service department.
Contact your dealer for additional information, or the
procedure can be found in the service manual. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-11
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
.
• In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
{CAUTION:
• In hilly or mountainous terrain.
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned. The
air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to
stop flame if the engine backfires. If it is not
there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
• When doing frequent trailer towing.
• Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
Notice: Use of automatic transaxle fluid labeled
other than DEXRON®-III, Approved for the
H-Specification, may damage your vehicle, and the
damages may not be covered by your warranty.
Always use automatic transaxle fluid labeled
DEXRON®-III, Approved for the H-Specification.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can
easily get into your engine, which will damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter in place when you
are driving.
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
page 5-29.
Manual Transaxle Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transaxle fluid level. A
transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to the dealership
service department and have it repaired as soon as
page 6-12 for the proper fluid to use.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
Hydraulic Clutch
The hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle is
self-adjusting. This system does not have its own
reservoir. It receives fluid from the brake master
cylinder reservoir.
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
• Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you do not
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system. These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle. See
information on location.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the coolant surge tank, but only
when the engine is cool. If the coolant surge tank is
empty, a special fill procedure is necessary. See Engine
Add Coolant to the Coolant Surge Tank.”
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the COLD
FILL line.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight.
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Intercooler System Coolant
(2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine Only)
{CAUTION:
Turning the fill neck pressure cap when the
engine and intercooler are hot can allow
steam and scalding liquids to blow out and
burn you badly. Never turn the fill neck
pressure cap — even a little — when the
engine and intercooler are hot.
Park your vehicle on a level surface and turn off the
engine. When the engine is cold, the coolant level
should be visible within the horizontal tube section of
the fill neck. When the engine is warm, the coolant level
could be as high as the FULL HOT line on the fill
neck, or a little higher.
The intercooler system fill neck is located in the front of
the engine compartment, near the center of the
page 5-12 for more information on location.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Coolant to the Intercooler System
Fill Neck
{CAUTION:
If coolant is not visible in the fill neck, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the fill neck, but be sure that
the cooling system, including the fill neck pressure cap,
is cool before you do so.
Adding only plain water to your intercooler
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. With
plain water or the wrong mixture, your engine
could get too hot. Your engine could catch fire
and you or others could be burned. Use a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the
intercooler system pressure cap — even a
little — they can come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the intercooler system,
including the intercooler system pressure cap,
is hot. Wait for the intercooler system and
intercooler system pressure cap to cool if you
ever have to turn the pressure cap.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and
crack the engine, intercooler, and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Add the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture to the
fill neck, until there is coolant visible in the horizontal
tube section of the fill neck.
{CAUTION:
4. With the fill neck pressure cap off, start the engine
and let it run for at least 30 seconds. Watch out for
the engine cooling fan. Turn the engine off. By
this time, the coolant level inside the fill neck may
be lower. If the level drops so that coolant is
no longer visible in the horizontal tube section of
the fill neck, add more of the DEX-COOL® coolant
mixture to the fill neck until the level is again
visible in the horizontal tube section.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the fill neck pressure cap when
the intercooler system, including the upper
intercooler hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure
cap slowly counterclockwise about one-quarter of
a turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
will allow any remaining pressure to be vented.
5. Replace the intercooler system pressure cap. Be
sure the pressure cap is hand-tight.
If the coolant is not at the proper level when the
system cools down again, see your dealer.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
more information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature warning
light on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine
more information.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You
or others could be badly burned. Stop your
engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you get the engine coolant temperature warning with
no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turn it off.
An engine coolant temperature warning can indicate a
serious problem. See Engine Coolant Temperature
2. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
If you get an engine coolant temperature warning, but
see or hear no steam, the problem may not be too
serious. Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot
when you:
3. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked. If you still
have the warning, turn off the engine and get everyone
out of the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
2.0L L4 Supercharged engine
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
B. Intercooler System Pressure Cap
C. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
2.2L L4 engine
A. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
{CAUTION:
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do
not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
If your vehicle is equipped with the 2.2L L4 engine and
there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running. If the
engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If it
is not, your vehicle needs service.
The coolant level should be at the COLD FILL line. If it
is not, you may have a leak at the pressure cap or
in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
pump, or somewhere in the cooling system.
If your vehicle is equipped with the 2.0L L4
Supercharged engine and there seems to be no leak,
with the engine on, check to see if the electric engine
cooling fans are running. If the engine is overheating, the
fans should be running. If they are not, your vehicle
needs service.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If
you do, you can be burned.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
CAUTION: (Continued)
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not at the COLD FILL
line, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but
be sure the cooling system, including the coolant surge
tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it. See
{CAUTION:
2.2L L4 Engine
If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank, add
coolant as follows:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
2. Then keep turning the
pressure cap slowly,
and remove it.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure
cap when the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about two or two and one-half
turns. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. This
will allow any pressure still left to be vented out
the discharge hose.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower than
the COLD FILL line, add more of the proper mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches
the COLD FILL line.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
See your dealer, if necessary.
2.0L L4 Supercharged Engine
If no coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank, you will
need to either see your dealer or refer to the Dealer
Service Manual for a special coolant service fill
procedure to ensure enough coolant is added. To
purchase a service manual, see Service Publications
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the COLD FILL line on the tank. Wait about
five minutes, then check to see if the level is below
the COLD FILL line. If the level is below the line,
add additional coolant to bring the level up to
the line. Repeat this procedure until the level
remains constant at the COLD FILL line for at least
five minutes.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against freezing.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding Washer Fluid
Brakes
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it. Add
washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
Brake Fluid
Your brake master cylinder
and, on manual transaxle
vehicles, the hydraulic
clutch use the same
reservoir. The reservoir is
filled with DOT-3 brake
fluid. See Engine
page 5-12 for the location
of the reservoir.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid,
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
adding water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the
brake fluid goes down to an acceptable level during
normal brake lining wear. When new linings are put in,
the fluid level goes back up. The other reason is
that fluid is leaking out of the brake and/or clutch
hydraulic system. If it is, you should have your brake
and/or clutch system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will not
work at all.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add fluid
when your linings are worn, then you will have too
much fluid when you get new brake linings. You should
add or remove brake fluid, as necessary, only when
work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area
around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill on
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
and/or clutch hydraulic system.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts so
badly that they will have to be replaced. Do not
let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle. If
you do, wash it off immediately. See Appearance
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
page 6-12.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes and may have rear
drum brakes or rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
If your vehicle has rear drum brakes, they do not have
wear indicators, but if you ever hear a rear brake
rubbing noise, have the rear brake linings inspected
immediately. Also, the rear brake drums should
be removed and inspected each time the tires are
removed for rotation or changing. When you have the
front brake pads replaced, have the rear brakes
inspected, too.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear
the brake wear warning sound, have your
vehicle serviced.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you do not, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that
are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your
front and rear brakes can change — for the worse. The
braking performance you have come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone puts in
the wrong replacement brake parts.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a moderate brake stop, your disc
brakes adjust for wear. If you rarely make a moderate
or heavier stop, then your brakes might not adjust
correctly. If you drive in that way, then — very
carefully — make a few moderate brake stops about
every 1,000 miles (1 600 km), so your brakes will
adjust properly.
Battery
If you have rear drum brakes and your brake pedal
goes down farther than normal, the rear drum brakes
may need adjustment. Adjust them by backing up
and firmly applying the brakes a few times.
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is
time for a new battery, get one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label. We
recommend an ACDelco® replacement battery.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Your vehicle’s battery is located in the trunk. You do not
need to access the battery to jump start your vehicle.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality GM
brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings
wear down and you need new ones put in — be sure
you get new approved GM replacement parts.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Storage
{CAUTION:
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
{CAUTION:
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
page 5-40 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Jump Starting
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be able
to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
You will not see the battery of your vehicle under
the hood. It is located in the trunk. You will not need
to access your battery for jump starting. Your
vehicle has a remote positive (+) and a remote
negative (−) jump starting terminal.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved in
the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
The remote positive
terminal is located under a
red tethered cap on the
engine compartment
fuse block. Lift the cap to
access the terminal.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off
the radio and all lamps that are not needed. This
will avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And
it could save the radio!
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The remote negative (−)
terminal, marked GND (−),
is located behind the
{CAUTION:
engine coolant surge tank.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you don’t, explosive gas could be present.
for more information on the location of the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminals on
your vehicle.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you. Keep
hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+)
terminal location on the vehicle with the dead
battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the
vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a heavy,
unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cable to
the negative (−) terminal location on the vehicle with
the dead battery. Your vehicle has a remote
negative (−) terminal marked GND (−).
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
the engine for a while.
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If
it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs
service.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.
Headlamp Aiming
The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming
system. The aim has been preset at the factory and
should need no further adjustment
However, If the vehicle is damaged in an accident, the
headlamp aim may be affected and adjustment may
be necessary.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this
may also mean the vertical aim needs to be adjusted.
Negative (−) Terminal (GND)
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your
dealer for service if the headlamps need to be re-aimed.
It is possible however, to re-aim the headlamps as
described in the following procedure.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
The vertical headlamp aiming screws are located under
the hood near the headlamps.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall or other flat
surface.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a perfectly
level surface which is level all the way to the wall
or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice or mud
on it.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all other
work stopped while headlamp aiming is being done.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a
full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) on
the driver’s seat.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a 6 mm
socket wrench.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To adjust the vertical aim on the headlamps, do the
following:
1. Find the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam lamp.
4. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being aimed. This should allow only
the beam of light from the headlamp being
aimed to be seen on the flat surface.
2. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on the lamp. Record the distance.
3. At the wall or other flat surface, measure from the
ground upward the recorded distance from Step 2
and draw or tape a horizontal line the width of
the vehicle.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to read
and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
5. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. The top
edge of the cut-off should be positioned at the
bottom edge of the horizontal tape line.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for the opposite headlamp.
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, and Parking Lamps
A. Front Turn Signal/Parking Lamp
B. Sidemarker
C. Headlamp
2. Remove the two wing bolts from the headlamp
assembly.
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
3. Remove the two plastic fasteners from the fascia.
4. Pull the front fascia back.
for more information.
You may need someone else to assist you with
Steps 3 and 4.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the headlamp assembly up on an angle and
towards the radiator to remove.
11. Reinstall the bulb assembly by reversing
Steps 1 through 8.
When reinstalling the headlamp assembly, first
ensure that the wiring harness is in its original
position. If not, the headlamp assembly will not fit
correctly.
6. Disconnect the bulb base from the wiring harness
by lifting the plastic locking tab.
7. To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:
• Disconnect the wiring harness from the bulb
socket.
You will also need to line up the two tabs on the
bottom of the assembly that fit into two slots in the
headlamp assembly bracket.
• Remove the black retainer by turning it
counterclockwise.
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
8. Turn the bulb socket for the headlamp, front turn
signal or parking lamp counterclockwise to remove.
For the sidemarker bulb, you will need to us a
tool to assist in turning the bulb socket.
To replace a CHMSL bulb, do the following:
9. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
10. Install a new bulb.
information.
2. Locate the CHMSL bulb assembly in the trunk lid.
3. Use a tool to depress the plastic tabs to release the
bulb assembly.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps and Turn Signal
Lamps (Coupe)
To replace a taillamp or rear turn signal bulb, do the
following:
4. Pull the bulb assembly down to access the bulbs.
5. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out.
6. Install a new bulb.
more information.
2. Remove the fastener which holds down the
trunk trim.
7. Align the tabs in the bulb assembly with the
assembly in the trunk lid. Push the bulb assembly
back into place until it snaps in. You may need
to use the tool to guide the tabs into the assembly.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness by lifting up on the
tab to release and pull it straight out.
4. Remove the two nuts from the taillamp assembly.
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Remove the taillamp from the quarter panel.
6. Remove the taillamp bulb socket from the assembly
by turning it counterclockwise.
7. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
8. Install a new bulb.
9. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
A. Sidemarker
B. Stoplamp/Turn Signal/Taillamp
C. Back-up
information.
2. Remove the fastener which holds down the
trunk trim.
6. Locate the bulb you wish to change
3. Remove the outer two screws from the taillamp
assembly.
7. Remove the taillamp bulb socket from the assembly
by turning it counterclockwise.
4. Disconnect the wiring harness by lifting up on the
tab to release and pull it straight out.
8. Pull the old bulb out of the socket.
9. Install a new bulb.
5. Remove the taillamp from the quarter panel.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 6 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Back-Up Lamps (Coupe)
To replace a back-up lamp bulb, do the following:
information.
2. Locate the back-up lamp bulb assembly in the
trunk lid.
3. Remove the bulb socket by turning it
counterclockwise.
On vehicles that have a back-up lamp cover, first
remove it by depressing the tab at the top.
4. Pull out the old bulb.
5. Install a new bulb.
6. Reinstall the bulb socket by aligning the tabs and
turning it clockwise to secure.
Reinstall the back-up lamp cover if your vehicle
has one.
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
Here is how to remove the Shepherd’s Hook type:
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamps
Back-Up Lamps
Bulb Number
921
Center High-Mounted
Stoplamp (CHMSL)
1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
windshield.
912
Front Parking/Turn Signal Lamps
Halogen Headlamps,
High/Low-Beam
3157KX
9007 LL
194
Sidemarker
Stoplamp, Taillamp and Turn
Signal Lamps
3057KX
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least
twice a year for wear or cracking. See “Scheduled
Maintenance” for more information on wiper blade
inspection.
2. Push the release lever and slide the wiper assembly
toward the driver’s side of the vehicle.
3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s owner manual.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If
your tread is badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace them.
{CAUTION:
• Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See Loading Your
inflation pressure adjustment for high speed
driving.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For cold weather driving conditions, you may prefer to
get tires designed for snow or ice. See your dealer
for details regarding winter tire availability and proper
Low-Profile Performance Tire
If your vehicle has 215/45R18 size tires, they are
classified as low-profile performance tires. These tires
are designed for very responsive driving on wet or
dry pavement. You may also notice more road noise
with low-profile performance tires and that they tend to
wear faster.
If you choose to use winter tires:
• Use tires of the same brand and tread type on all
four wheel positions.
• Use only radial ply tires of the same size,
load range, and speed rating as your original
equipment tires.
Notice: If your vehicle has low-profile tires, they
are more susceptible to damage from road hazards
or curb impact than standard profile tires. Tire
and/or wheel assembly damage can occur when
coming into contact with road hazards like,
potholes, or sharp edged objects or when sliding
into a curb. Your GM warranty does not cover
this type of damage. Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and, when possible avoid contact
with curbs, potholes and other road hazards.
Winter tires with the same speed rating as your original
equipment tires may not be available for H, V, W
and ZR speed rated tires. If you choose winter tires with
a lower speed rating, never exceed the tire’s maximum
speed capability.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labelling
Useful information about a tire is molded into its
sidewall. The examples below show a typical passenger
vehicle tire and a compact spare tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT (Department of Transportation)
code is the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The
TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size,
and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded
onto both sides of the tire, although only one side
may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on
three performance factors: treadwear, traction and
temperature resistance. For more information see
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination of letters
and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width,
height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following the DOT (Department of
Transportation) code is the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load.
(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).
For more information on tire pressure and inflation see
(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters and numbers
define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type and service description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size means the tire is for
temporary use only.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread life of approximately
3,000 miles (5 000 km) and should not be driven
at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when a regular road tire
has lost air and gone flat. If your vehicle has a compact
(G) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The letter
R means radial ply construction; the letter D means
diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter B means
belted-bias ply construction.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows an example of a typical
passenger vehicle tire size.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These characters represent
the load range and speed rating of the tire. The load
index represents the load carry capacity a tire is certified
to carry. The load index can range from 1 to 279. The
speed rating is the maximum speed a tire is certified
to carry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the
first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if
the tire size aspect ratio is 60, as shown in item C of the
illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure in
a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of curb
weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity weight;
and production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the tire
that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or
bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same moldings on
the other sidewall of the tire.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called “wear bars,” that show across the tread of a tire
when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards): A
tire information system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are molded
into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform Tire Quality
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-30.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire
beads are seated.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to a
tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire
can operate.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar, below the driver’s door latch.
This label lists your vehicle’s original equipment
tires and their recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, shown
on the label, is the minimum amount of air pressure
needed to support your vehicle’s maximum load carrying
capacity.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-30. How you load your vehicle affects
vehicle handling and ride comfort, never load your
vehicle with more weight than it was designed to carry.
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
When to Check
• Reduced fuel economy
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget to
check the compact spare tire, it should be at 60 psi
(420 kPa). For additional information regarding
page 5-80.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you
can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Check
High Speed Operation
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for
at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
{CAUTION:
Driving at high speeds, 100 mph (160 km/h) or
higher, puts an additional strain on tires.
Sustained high-speed driving causes
excessive heat build up and can cause sudden
tire failure. You could have a crash and you or
others could be killed. Some high-speed rated
tires require inflation pressure adjustment for
high speed operation. When speed limits and
road conditions are such that a vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, make sure the tires are
rated for high speed operation, in excellent
condition, and set to the correct cold tire
inflation pressure for the vehicle load.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If
the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
If your vehicle has 215/45R18 size tires, set the cold tire
inflation pressure to 35 psi (241 kPa) for the front and
rear tires, when operating your vehicle under high-speed
conditions. When you end high-speed driving return
the tires to the cold inflation pressure shown on the tire
and loading information label.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not include the compact spare tire in your tire
rotation.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and
rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires as
soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
on page 5-67 for more information.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all
page 5-70.
When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When It Is Time for New Tires
Buying New Tires
One way to tell when it’s
To find out what kind and size of tires your vehicle
needs, look at the tire and loading information label. For
more information about this label and its location on
time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was new had
a Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec)
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires,
GM recommends that you get tires with that same
TPC Spec number. That way your vehicle will continue
to have tires that are designed to give proper
endurance, handling, speed rating, load range, traction,
ride and other things during normal service on your
vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design,
the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for
mud and snow).
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same size,
load range, speed rating and construction type (bias,
bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
{CAUTION:
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the
vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes may also cause damage to your vehicle.
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
compact spare temporarily, it was developed
for use on your vehicle. See Compact Spare
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance. (This
applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to
have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned
and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the
longest tire life and best overall performance.
Adjustments to wheel alignment and tire balancing will
not be necessary on a regular basis. However, if
you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling to
one side or the other, the alignment may need to
be checked. If you notice your vehicle vibrating when
driving on a smooth road, your tires and wheels
may need to be rebalanced. See your dealer for proper
diagnosis.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
information.
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle
and you or others may be injured in a crash.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on your
vehicle and tire size combination, and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do
not spin your vehicle’s wheels.
dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
or how far it’s been driven. It could fail suddenly
and cause a crash. If you have to replace a
wheel, use a new GM original equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the front tires.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If your vehicle has a tire size other than
P205/55R16 or 215/45R18 size tires, use tire chains
only where legal and only when you must. Use
only SAE Class S-type chains that are the proper
size for your tires. Install them on the front tires and
tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If your vehicle has P205/55R16 or 215/45R18
size tires, do not use tire chains, there is not
enough clearance.
Tire chains used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can cause damage
to the brakes, suspension or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the tire chains
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a Tire Goes Flat
{CAUTION:
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly.
But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a
few tips about what to expect and what to do:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to do
maintenance or repairs is dangerous without
the appropriate safety equipment and training.
The jack provided with your vehicle is
designed only for changing a flat tire. If it is
used for anything else, you or others could be
badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips off
the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to
a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would;
use in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use your
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing a Flat Tire
CAUTION: (Continued)
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers.
To be even more certain the vehicle will not
move, you should put blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on the
other side, at the opposite end of the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
When you have a flat tire, use the following example as
a guide to assist you in the placement of wheel blocks.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever in
PARK (P), or shift a manual transaxle to
FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).
3. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle.
CAUTION: (Continued)
The following information will tell you how to use the
jack and change a tire.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the nut that holds down the spare tire. See
Uplevel Models
Compact Spare Tire on page 5-80
4. Remove the spare tire by placing your hands at the
four and eight o’clock positions. Gently pull it up
and out of the trunk.
information.
5. Remove the wing nut that holds the jack and
remove the jack and wheel wrench.
Uplevel Model
2. Lift the trunk liner and place the plastic hook in the
lip of the trunk lid.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Remove the wing nut that retains the jack and the
spare tire.
4. Remove the spare tire by placing your hands at the
four and eight o’clock positions. Gently pull it up
and out of the trunk.
The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A) and wheel
wrench (B).
Uplevel Model
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You will need to turn the plastic wheel nut
counterclockwise to loosen the wheel wrench from
the jack.
Press the button and then pull on the end of the wheel
wrench to extend the handle.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Don’t remove them yet.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Notice: Make sure that the jack lift head is in the
correct position or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
1. If your vehicle is equipped with plastic wheel
covers, use the wheel wrench to loosen the plastic
wheel nut caps.
4. Position the jack lift head at the jack location
nearest the flat tire. The front location is about
8 inches (20 cm) rearward from the front wheel
opening. The rear location is about 4 inches (10 cm)
forward of the rear wheel opening.
Once you have loosened the plastic wheel nut caps
with the wheel wrench, you can finish loosening
them with your fingers. The plastic nut caps do not
come off.
2. Using the flat end of the wheel wrench, pry along
the edge of the wheel cover until it comes off.
If your vehicle has aluminum wheels, first remove
the center cap with your finger or the wheel wrench.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Raise the jack head until it fits firmly in the
vehicle’s frame, where the notch is located, nearest
the flat tire.
7. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handle
clockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough off the
ground so there is enough room for the compact
spare tire to fit under the vehicle.
6. Put the compact spare tire near you.
8. Remove all of the wheel nuts.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is
dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack you
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack.
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to
get all the rust or dirt off.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
{CAUTION:
and spare wheel.
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
torque specification.
10. Place the compact spare tire on the wheel-mounting
surface.
{CAUTION:
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification. See Capacities and
torque specification.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts. If
you do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.
11. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded end of
the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by
hand until the wheel is held against the hub.
12. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone. Store
all these in the proper place.
13. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in a crisscross
sequence, as shown.
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put a wheel cover on the compact
spare, you could damage the cover or the spare.
Do not try to put a wheel cover on your compact spare
tire. It will not fit. Store the wheel cover in the trunk
until you have the flat tire repaired or replaced.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uplevel Model
Base Model
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To store a flat or spare tire and tools, do the following:
1. Remove the stow bolt extension rod and sleeve
from the jack.
2. Reattach the wheel wrench to the jack.
3. Screw the stow bolt extension rod and the sleeve
into the existing spare tire hold-down bolt.
4. Place the flat tire face down into the spare tire hub.
Avoid scraping the aluminum wheel, if equipped, on
the hold-down bolt.
After installing the compact spare on the vehicle, stop
as soon as possible and make sure the spare tire
is correctly inflated. The compact spare is made to
perform well at speeds up to 65 mph (105 km/h)
for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size tire repaired or
replaced at your convenience. Of course, it is best
to replace the spare with a full-size tire as soon as
possible. The spare tire will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
5. Place the jack into the center of the flat tire, being
careful not to scratch the inside of the wheel.
6. Place the smaller jack hold-down nut in a safe
place for use when you put the compact spare
tire back into the trunk.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get
caught on the rails. That can damage the tire and
wheel, and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
7. Remove the plastic sleeve from the stow bolt
extension rod. Secure the jack and road wheel
using the larger plastic retainer.
Do not use the compact spare on other vehicles.
And do not mix the compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They will not fit. Keep the
spare tire and its wheel together.
The compact spare tire is for temporary use only.
Replace the compact spare with a full-size tire as soon
as possible.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not use tire chains on
your compact spare.
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated when
the vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not use any of these products unless this manual
says you can. In many uses, these will damage
the vehicle:
• Alcohol
• Laundry Soap
• Bleach
• Reducing Agents
Appearance Care
Cleaning products can be hazardous. Some are toxic.
Other cleaning products can burst into flames if a match
is struck near them or if they get on a hot part of the
vehicle. Some are dangerous if their fumes are inhaled
in an enclosed space. When anything from a container
is used to clean the vehicle, be sure to follow the
manufacturer’s warnings and instructions. Always open
the doors or windows of the vehicle when cleaning
the inside.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and loose
dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic, and painted surfaces
with a clean, damp cloth.
Never use these to clean the vehicle:
• Gasoline
GM-approved cleaning products can be obtained from
your dealer.
• Benzene
• Naphtha
Here are some cleaning tips:
• Carbon Tetrachloride
• Acetone
• Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
• Clean up stains as soon as you can before they set.
• Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
• Paint Thinner
• Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
• To avoid forming a ring on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area immediately or it
will set.
• Turpentine
• Lacquer Thinner
• Nail Polish Remover
They can all be hazardous — some more than
others — and they can all damage the vehicle, too.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Most stains can be removed with club soda water. To
clean, use the following instructions:
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
1. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
2. Apply club soda water to a clean, soft, white cloth.
Do not over-saturate; the cloth should not drip water.
7. If the cleaner leaves a ring effect, follow up with the
club soda water instructions given earlier in this
section.
3. Clean the entire area. Avoid getting the fabric
too wet.
4. Start cleaning from the seams into the stain to
avoid a ring effect.
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, black coffee,
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine,
and blood can be removed using the club soda water
instructions given earlier in this section. If an odor lingers
after cleaning vomit or urine, treat the area with a
water and baking soda solution: 1 teaspoon (5 ml) of
baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml) of lukewarm water.
Let dry.
5. Continue cleaning, using a clean area of the cloth
each time it becomes soiled.
6. When the stain is removed, blot the cleaned area
with another dry, clean, soft, white cloth.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. First, try the cleaner on an area of the fabric that is
not easily seen to make sure the cleaner does not
affect the color of the fabric.
Stains caused by oil and grease can be cleaned with an
approved GM cleaner and a clean, white cloth.
2. For liquids: blot with a clean, soft, white cloth. For
solids: remove as much as possible and then
vacuum or brush.
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the “Using Cleaner on
Fabric” instructions described earlier.
3. Spray a small amount of the cleaner onto a clean
soft, white, cloth. Do not apply spray directly to
the fabric.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vinyl
Instrument Panel
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through the
windshield under certain conditions.
• Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt. This
may have to be done more than once.
• Things like tar, asphalt, and shoe polish will stain if
they are not removed quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl cleaner. See your dealer for this product.
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
Glass Surfaces
• For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass. When cleaning the glass on your vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
• Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish, or shoe polish on leather.
• Soiled or stained leather should be cleaned
immediately. If dirt is allowed to work into the finish,
it can harm the leather.
Glass should be cleaned often. Your GM dealer can
provide an approved cleaner, or a liquid household glass
cleaner will remove normal tobacco smoke and dust
films on interior glass. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer. See
not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do, it
may severely weaken them. In a crash, they
might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a car
washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-84.
Washing Your Vehicle
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth of
color, gloss retention, and durability.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather,
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. To help keep the paint finish looking
new, keep the vehicle in a garage or covered whenever
possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. GM-approved cleaning products can be
obtained from your dealer. See Vehicle
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap, or other material may be on the blade
or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a glass
cleaning liquid or powder and water solution. The
windshield is clean if beads do not form when it is rinsed
with water.
The vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish. The
clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your GM dealer or an underbody car washing system
can do this for you.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage can
take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the
paint surface.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish
should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode
quickly and may develop into major repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your GM dealer. Larger areas
of finish damage can be corrected in your GM
dealer’s body and paint shop.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches and other light
surface contamination.
See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the following products.
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleaner Wax
Description
Usage
Cleans, shines and
Polishing Cloth
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Removes tar, road oil and
asphalt.
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
protects in one easy step,
no wiping necessary.
Wax-Treated
Tar and Road
Oil Remover
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Vinyl Cleaner
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans and
lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Quickly and easily
Cleans vinyl.
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl and
cloth upholstery.
Spot Lifter
Glass Cleaner
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Odor Eliminator
See your General Motors parts department for
these products.
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification
The eighth character in your VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your engine,
specifications and replacement parts.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label in the trunk, on the driver side,
near the spare tire cover. It is very helpful if you
ever need to order parts. On this label, you will find the
following:
• VIN
• Model designation
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp Wiring
Electrical System
The headlamp wiring is protected by fuses. Should your
headlamps fail to function, have your headlamp
system checked right away.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your vehicle
unless you check with your dealer first. Some
electrical equipment can damage your vehicle and
the damage wouldn’t be covered by your warranty.
Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other
components from working as they should.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow or ice, the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
A fuse in the fuse panel protect the power windows and
other power accessories. When the current load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens, protecting
the circuit until the problem is fixed.
If you ever have a problem on the road and do not have
a spare fuse, you can “borrow” one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without — like the radio or
cigarette lighter — and use its fuse if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by electrical problems.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle: the floor
console fuse block and the engine compartment
fuse block.
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Floor Console Fuse Block
Fuses
Usage
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Fuse Puller
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Amplifier
Cluster
Ignition Switch
The floor console fuse block is located on the
passenger’s side of the floor console under the
instrument panel. To access the fuse block, remove the
panel on the side of the console.
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
9
10
Usage
Fuses
22
23
Usage
Stoplamp
Empty
Empty
Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning
11
Empty
24
Sensing and Diagnostic Module
12
13
14
15
Spare
Airbag
Spare
Windshield Wiper
Climate Control System, Cluster,
Brake Transmission Shift Interlock
Engine Control Module, Transaxle
Control Module
Door Locks
Interior Lights
Audio System
Power Windows
25
26
27
28
29
16
17
18
Empty
Empty
Relays
30
31
Usage
Ignition 3
Empty
Electric Power Steering, Steering
Wheel Control
Sunroof
Spare
19
20
21
32
Retained Accessory Power
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
SPARES
Usage
Fuses
Usage
Spares
ABS
Anti-lock Brake System
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
Powertrain Control Module/Engine
Control Module
PCM/ECM
COOLING
Cooling Fan 2
FAN 2
EPS
Electric Power Steering
Park Lamps
CRANK
Starter
PARK LPS
WIPER
COOLING
FAN 1
Windshield Wiper
Ignition
Engine Cooling Fan
IP IGN
BCM3
BCM2
FOG LP
HORN
Body Control Module 3
Body Control Module 2
Fog Lamps
A/C CLUTCH
AFTERCOOL
ABS2
Air Conditioning Clutch
Aftercooler
Anti-lock Brake System
Horn
Engine Control Module,
Transmission
ECM/TRANS
BACK UP
RH LOW BEAM Passenger’s Side Low Beam
LH LOW BEAM Driver’s Side Low Beam
Back-Up Lamps
RH HI BEAM
LH HI BEAM
FUEL PUMP
EMISSIONS
INJECTORS
Passenger’s Side High Beam
Driver’s Side High Beam
Fuel Pump
TRUNK/
OUTLET
Trunk, Accessory Power Outlet
S BAND/
ONSTAR
Audio, OnStar®
Emissions
LIGHTER
MIRRORS
Cigarette Lighter
Mirrors
Injectors
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
HTD SEATS
CAN VENT
Usage
Relays
COOLING
FAN1
Usage
Heated Seats
Canister Vent
Cooling Fan 1
FUEL PUMP Fuel Pump
WIPER1
Windshield Wiper 1
COOL
Series/Parallel Cooling Fan
(Cobalt SS)
Relays
Usage
SER/PAR
REAR DEFOG Rear Defogger
COOLING
Cooling Fan 2
FAN2
POWERTRAIN Powertrain
A/C CLUTCH Air Conditioning Clutch
AFTRCOOL
RUN/CRANK Run, Crank
Aftercooler Pump (Cobalt SS)
WIPER2
CRANK
Windshield Wiper 2
Starter
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
1.0 lbs
0.45 kg
2.2L Engine
2.0L Engine
Intercooler System 2.0L Engine
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
Transaxle, Automatic (Complete Drain and Refill)
Transaxle, Manual (Complete Drain and Refill)
Wheel Nut Torque
6.8 quarts
7.4 quarts
2.0 quarts
5.0 quarts
13.5 gallons
7.0 quarts
1.8 quarts
100 ft lb
6.5 L
7.0 L
1.9 L
4.7 L
51.1 L
6.6 L
1.7 L
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the appropriate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine
2.2L L4
VIN Code
Transaxle
Spark Plug Gap
0.04 inch (1.0 mm)
0.04 inch (1.0 mm)
Automatic
Manual
F
P
2.0L L4 (Supercharged)
Manual
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Maintenance Schedule
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know
exactly how you will drive it. You may drive very
short distances only a few times a week. Or you may
drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty
weather. You may use your vehicle in making deliveries.
Or you may drive it to work, to do errands or in many
other ways.
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan
supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary
to keep your vehicle in good working condition.
Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled
maintenance may not be covered by warranty.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
GM Goodwrench® dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-30.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-5.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
should be checked, when to check it and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message appears,
certain services, checks and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE OIL SOON message comes on,
it means that service is required for your vehicle.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within
the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if
you are driving under the best conditions, the engine oil
life system may not indicate that vehicle service is
necessary for over a year. However, your engine oil
and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
OIL SOON message comes on within 10 months
since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II
was performed.
Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
GM parts and reset the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the CHANGE OIL SOON
message comes on 10 months or more since the last
service or if the message has not come on at all
for one year.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to
reset the oil life system whenever the oil is changed.
on the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Service.
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid
as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated
miles (kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(83 000) (125 000) (166 000) (207 500) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
page 5-21.
•
•
•
•
•
Change automatic transaxle fluid
and filter (severe service only).
See footnote (h).
•
•
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service (or every
five years, whichever occurs first).
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect drum brake linings for wear or cracks.
Inspect other brake parts, including drums, wheel
cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
(The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.)
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose or missing parts or
signs of wear. Inspect power steering lines and hoses for
proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches and trunk lid hinges and
latches. More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better and not stick or squeak.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace with genuine GM parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and for
damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator or cruise
control cables.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace blade inserts that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(h) Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist
you with these checks and services.
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
− Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, the fluid and filter do not require changing.
(i) Drain, flush and refill cooling system. This service can
be complex; you should have your dealer perform this
to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap and filler neck. Pressure test the cooling
system and pressure cap.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
details.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
(k) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
{CAUTION:
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add the proper fluid if necessary.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to start the
engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If the vehicle starts in
any other position, your vehicle needs service.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
page 5-63.
On manual transaxle vehicles, put the shift lever in
NEUTRAL (N), push the clutch down halfway, and try
to start the engine. The vehicle should start only
when the clutch is pushed down all the way to the
floor. If the vehicle starts when the clutch is not
pushed all the way down, your vehicle needs service.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• With an automatic transaxle, the ignition should turn
to LOCK only when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
• With a manual transaxle, the key should come out
only in LOCK.
Turn the steering wheel to the left and to the right.
It should only lock when turned to the right.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
on page 2-25.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Check
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by the
parking brake only.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front of your
vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to
apply the regular brake at once should the
vehicle begin to move.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-23.
Engine Coolant
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your dealer.
Intercooler
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets
System Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean,
(2.0L L4
drinkable water and use only
Supercharged DEX-COOL® Coolant.
engine)
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol.
Engine Oil
(2.2L L4
engine)
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
Hydraulic
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all
the requirements for your vehicle.
To determine the proper viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine,
Clutch System equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Windshield
Washer Solvent
Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
The engine requires a special
engine oil meeting GM Standard
GM4718M. Oils meeting this
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part No.
Parking Brake 12377985, in Canada 88901242) or
Cable Guides lubricant meeting requirements of
NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
standard may be identified with the
American Petroleum Institute
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Certified for Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. However, not all
synthetic API oils with the starburst
symbol will meet this GM standard.
You should look for and use only
an oil that meets GM Standard
GM4718M. GM Goodwrench® oil
meets all the requirements for your
vehicle. For the proper viscosity,
Engine Oil
(2.0L L4
Supercharged
engine)
Manual
Transaxle
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
DEXRON®-III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Automatic
Transaxle
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
in Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Key Lock
Cylinders
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Latch, Pivots, in Canada 992723) or lubricant
Spring Anchor meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
and Release Category LB or GC-LB.
Pawl
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. U.S. 12377985, in
Manual
Transaxle Shift Canada 88901242) or lubricant
Linkage
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Hood and
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,
Door Hinges
Clutch Linkage
Pivot Points
Engine Oil.
in Canada 10953474).
Dielectric Silicone Grease
Chassis Lubricant (GM Part
No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Weatherstrip
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
Conditioning
Chassis
Lubrication
in Canada 992887).
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
ACDelco® Part
Part
GM Part Number
Number
A2956C
PF456G
—
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
21888324
12579143
12569190
Windshield Wiper Blade (Hook Type)
Driver’s Side — 22 inches (56 cm)
Passenger’s Side — 17 inches (43 cm)
22660359
22722576
—
—
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-8 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Assistance and
Information
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
available from the vehicle registration or title, or the
plate at the top left of the instrument panel and
visible through the windshield.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
(kilometers).
When contacting Chevrolet, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if you
have a concern.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by the dealership without further help, contact
the Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center by calling
1-800-222-1020. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centre by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program
administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle
repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any other
venue for relief available to you.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using the
toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations and/or discontinue
its participation in this program.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
From Puerto Rico:
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user can communicate
with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada — Customer Assistance
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Customer Assistance Offices
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes
to write to Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to
Chevrolet’s Customer Assistance Center.
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
United States — Customer Assistance
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-CHEV-USA (243-8872)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overseas — Customer Assistance
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin
Islands) — Customer Assistance
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver’s or passenger’s adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle, such as hand controls and
wheelchair/scooter lifts.
The offer is available for a limited period of time from
the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or
to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new Chevrolet vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Chevrolet Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road. Call Chevrolet’s
Roadside Assistance at 1-800-CHEV-USA,
(1-800-243-8872) 24 hours a day, 365 days a year to
speak with a Chevrolet Roadside Assistance
representative.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Chevrolet’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty.
However, when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number.
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership for
warranty service or in the event of a
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Description of the problem.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use our
service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone call
away. Chevrolet Roadside Assistance:
1-800-CHEV-USA (1-800-234-8872), text telephone
(TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Courtesy Transportation
Chevrolet has always exemplified quality and value in
its offering of motor vehicles. To enhance your
ownership experience, we and our participating dealers
are proud to offer Courtesy Transportation, a customer
support program for new vehicles.
Chevrolet reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
Chevrolet’s judgement, the claims become excessive in
frequency or type of occurrence.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to retail
purchase/lease customers in conjunction with the
Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation options
are available when warranty repairs are required. This will
reduce your inconvenience during warranty repairs.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Scheduling Service Appointments
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you should
contact your dealer and request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Transportation Options
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum of
$30.00 a day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or rental
usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, Chevrolet
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a
one way or round trip shuttle service to a destination up
to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of up to a five-day maximum may be
available for the use of public transportation such as a
taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative,
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses of up to a
five-day maximum may be available. Claim amounts
should reflect actual costs and be supported by
original receipts.
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but it is
not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. A
separate booklet entitled “Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information” furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
GM dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your GM dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy Transportation
arrangements will be administered by appropriate
dealer personnel.
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called event
data recorders (EDR).
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during the
Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to engine
speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle speed,
safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. This information has been
used to improve vehicle crash performance and may be
used to improve crash performance of future vehicles and
driving safety. Unlike the data recorders on many
airplanes, these on-board systems do not record sounds,
such as conversation of vehicle occupants.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please check
the OnStar® subscription service agreement or manual
for information on its operations and data collection.
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Service Manuals
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, we certainly hope you will notify
General Motors. Please call the Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center at 1-800-222-1020, or write:
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Bulletins
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ....................... 3-45
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cleaning (cont.)
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cruise Control Lever ....................................... 3-10
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
E
Easy Entry Seat ............................................... 1-7
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-16
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
R
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts (cont.)
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-14
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-7
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
